TW401522B - Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW401522B
TW401522B TW87104368A TW87104368A TW401522B TW 401522 B TW401522 B TW 401522B TW 87104368 A TW87104368 A TW 87104368A TW 87104368 A TW87104368 A TW 87104368A TW 401522 B TW401522 B TW 401522B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
phantom
lens
hole
patent application
cushion body
Prior art date
Application number
TW87104368A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Kai C Su
Jack C White
Original Assignee
Technology Resource Int Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Technology Resource Int Corp filed Critical Technology Resource Int Corp
Priority to TW87104368A priority Critical patent/TW401522B/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW401522B publication Critical patent/TW401522B/en

Links

Abstract

The present invention encompasses a gasket defining an axially extending bore therethrough, a front mold having an edge circumscribing the front mold, wherein the edge is of a size to be complementarily received within at least a portion of the bore of the gasket so that the edge and the bore form a seal therebetween, and a rear mold having a rim circumscribing the rear mold, wherein the rim is sized to be complementarily received within at least a portion of the bore so that the rim and the bore form a seal therebetween. When the front mold and the rear mold are both disposed within the bore of the gasket, a volume is formed between the back surface of the front mold and the front surface of the rear mold and the interior surface of the gasket. A selected one of the front mold or the rear mold is axially and slidably movable within the bore relative to the other mold disposed within the bore to a desired one of a plurality of axial separation distances between the molds, whereby the volume is different for each separation distance. The different volumes correspond to different lens powers, so that the gasket of the present invention can form different lenses. The present invention includes an apparatus and method for assembling a lens-forming structure having the front mold, the rear mold, and the gasket comprising a collet for supporting the gasket so that at least one of the front mold or the rear mold are insertable into the bore thereof, a robotic arm for inserting the front mold into the bore of the gasket, and a piston for inserting the rear mold into the bore of the gasket. The piston axially moves within the bore of the gasket a selected one of the front mold or the rear mold relative to the other mold to a desired one of a plurality of axial separation distances between the molds. The present invention also includes an apparatus and method for forming a lens using the structure comprising a piston for axially moving within the bore of the gasket a selected one of the front mold or the rear mold relative to the other mold to a desired one of a plurality of axial separation distances between the molds. A needle also preferably also communicates with the bore of the gasket between the molds to provide fluid communication between the outer surface of the gasket and the bore to facilitate axial movement of the molds relative to each other. Another needle is used for injecting a desired amount of a lens-forming fluid into the bore of the gasket intermediate the front and rear molds, in which the fluid is cured to form the lens. Still another aspect of the present invention is a method for curing the lens-forming fluid, comprising exposing the lens-forming fluid to an ultra-violet light, wherein the exposure time is between twenty seconds and thirty minutes, which can completely cure the fluid. The exposure can occur by placing the lens-forming fluid intermediate a plurality of ultraviolet light sources, in which the intensity of the ultraviolet light is at least 1.2x10<-2> watts per square centimeter at a wavelength of 350 nanometers.

Description

A7 401522 B7____ 五、發明說明() 發明範禱: (靖先閱讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) 本發明係包括了一種用於鏡片的鑄造以及用於鏡片鑄 造之襯墊的裝置以及方法。本發明亦包含了一種用於儲存 鑄造了的鏡片的方法,以及一種裝置和方法,以將儲存了 的鏡片由用於形成此鏡片的鑄模中分離開來。 習用背景介紹: 眼鏡或是透鏡必須是能反應出一個人症狀的,其就如 同是一個人的形態上以及心理上的情形一般。用於眼鏡上 的透鏡是由一種透明的物質而製成者,而此物質通常是爲 玻璃或是塑膠者,並且該透鏡的尺寸以及形狀是在於產生 所需要效果的,也就是可將光線予以聚焦至一個人的眼睛 內,以可使其看得更淸楚。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 此類的透鏡係具有一種相當完善的幾何形狀,而此種 幾何形狀則決定了其在光學上的特性。每一片透鏡的形狀 是可由三方面來決定其特性:(1)其兩面的曲率;(其在中央 以及邊緣的厚度;以及(3)其直徑。一個透鏡兩面可具有完 全不同的幾何形狀,而其則包括了有下列形狀:球形、圓 柱形、圓環形、平凹形、消球差形(通爲橢圓形),以及 其他更新的形狀。例如,一個透鏡的表沿著其不同的軸的 地方係可具有固定的半徑的,如此該表面才可以呈幾何狀 的對稱,而這種表面則是爲吾人所熟知的球表面。球形透 鏡的表面鏡射出一個球形之一部份的形狀,而其中所有子 午線均具有相同曲率的半徑。而此種球形表面不是凸面就 是凹面》 7 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) ^〇US2 A7 __B7 五、發明說明() 換句話說,透鏡的表面係可具有兩個不同的軸的’每 一個軸均具有其不且的曲率半徑,如此該透鏡的表面則可 以呈現幾何上的對稱。一個具有散像現像的表面則是爲一 個幾何對稱表面的例子’且其特徵係在於其_個主要的子 午線之間均具有一個和彼此間是爲不同的曲率半徑。具有 最大曲率半徑之該子午線稱之爲“軸“,而具有較小曲率 半徑之該子午線則稱之爲”垂直軸“。具大散射現像之透 鏡的表面通常是具有一個圓柱形的表面以及一個圓環形的 表面。一個平凹形的表面以及一個消球差形的表面則是爲 用在爲人所熟知之技藝中其他透鏡表面的例子。 對於圓柱形的表面而言,沿著其軸之主要的子午線係 具有一個無限大的曲率半徑,例如是爲扁平形或是直線’ 而該垂直軸所具有的曲率半徑則係具有一個和一個圓柱形 的圓形半徑相同。一個內凹的圓柱形表面係可以互補的方 式而在其表面上容置一個圓柱體,而一個外凸的表面則相 似於該種圓柱體外部的表面。 該圓環形的表面係相似於一個凸圓的橫向面’也就是 是其係具有如同是一個輪胎內管的形狀者。因此,一個凸 圓的表面是相似於一個圓柱形的表面的’但是其經向的軸 則是彎曲的,而不是如同一個圓柱形般的是爲一直線。在 凸圓表面的垂直軸或是子午線所具有的曲率半徑是小於該 軸的半徑的。對於一個球形以及一個圓柱形表面而言’ 一 個凸圓的表面是可以藉由具有一個圓環形的外部表面而成 爲外凸,或是,其亦可以藉由具有一個圓環形的內部表面 8 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂---------線· 經濟部智慧財產局員Η消费合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 401522 at B7 五、發明說明() 而成爲內凹。 一個具有散射現象的表面是爲了一個具有散射現象的 人所使用的,而其眼角膜則是爲橢圓形’而不是正常的圓 形。每個具有散射現象的人,其眼角膜之長形部份的朝向 並不是相同的。例如,一個人所具有的軸可以是爲5度, 另一個人則可能是3 0度’然而另外其他的人則又可能是 具有其他的朝向。透鏡表面的軸的朝向必須是和眼角膜長 形部份的朝向而相互吻合的。 不同的透鏡表面是可以合倂使用的。通常而言’一個 透鏡的前方表面是爲球形,而後方表面則可以是球形、圓 柱形或是圓環形。同是,該前方的表面亦可以是爲一個平 面。在一個透鏡處各種表面極致的合倂是由其光學上的特 性,其使用的用途以及其外部的形狀所決定的。 除了形狀,厚度亦是爲透鏡特性的一項重要因素。用 於形成透鏡的玻璃或是塑膠是在於形成透鏡厚度的一個重 要因子。因爲重量輕、密度、折射率以及防撞等的特性, 今日許多的透鏡是由塑膠而製成者。由塑膠形成製品的例 子包括了有異丁烯酸甲脂(一種熱塑性樹脂,通常是以其 商標“Plexiglas”或是“Perspex”來稱呼),以及碳水化 合物,一般亦稱之爲C R 3 9。 C R 3 9是現今用於製作透鏡最受歡迎的材料,部份 因素是因爲所有用於眼睛光學的透鏡均可用此種材料製成 。C R 3 9是多元脂的一種石油提煉物,其是屬於可聚合 熱塑性樹脂的一族。在製造時,可由C R 3 9中獲得一種 9 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) ί ------訂·! ---線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 A7 4015^2 _______B7___:_ 五、發明說明() 單體。此種單體是爲一種淸澈的液體,其係具有甘油的黏 滯性,並且在冷藏時仍能保持其液體狀,但在室溫下經數 月後則逐漸轉硬。在形成一個透鏡時,該液體單體係貯存 於一個由兩個模子以及一個襯墊所界定的容器中。一旦該 單體係放置在該容器中後,其會形成爲一個硬化了的聚化 透鏡,且會具有該模子的形狀。 用於製成聚化透鏡的玻璃模子在製造c R 3 9透鏡的 過程中是爲一項重要的因素。其並不僅僅是因爲該模子根 據所需要的光學特性而形成正確的透鏡形狀,而且更因爲 透鏡成品的表面品質是依賴於模子的正確性來決定的,因 爲該透鏡的表面是一種模子內部表面的完全複製。依此該 模子內部的表面必須是以相當精準的方式來準備好,而在 製造之後,則是以加熱來硬化,以能抵抗聚化過程的限制 形成雙重焦點或是三重焦點透鏡部份的一種前方模體 倍率,亦可用來形成透鏡。此種模體倍率係包括了一段由 切割模體凹陷之半部所形成的向內凹陷曲線,以在該透鏡 的前方表面形成該模體倍率。此段的曲線同時亦形成了遠 端部的外凸表面,以及一個供閱讀倍率之更加外凸的表面 0 如上所述之該液體單體係放置在一個由兩個模體以及 一個襯墊所形成的容器內以形成爲一個透鏡。如同在第1 圖中所示之剖視圖中所見到者,該爲人所熟知的襯墊一般 是稱之爲T形墊G,其係具有兩個孔洞以及兩個以互補的 ^-----.--—j^i!----線· {猜先閲讀背面之注奇爹項再填窝本頁) 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 费 合 作 杜 印 製 «01522 A7 —&quot;1 ---—— --_________ 五、發明說明() 方式而個別容置一個模體Μ於其內部的端點。不同的T形 墊G是用以形成不同的透鏡倍率的,因爲每一個τ形墊G 會形成一個預先形成且係在兩個模體Μ之間而將其分開的 軸。也就是說,一個Τ形墊G係會將該模體芬的遠遠的, 以形成一個具有較高倍率的透鏡倍率,而在相互比較下, 另一個Τ形墊G則係用於形成一個具有較低倍率的透鏡。 依此,製造者必須維持分別的Τ形墊達+ 2個透鏡,另一 個則是達—3個透鏡,而另一個則是達一4個透鏡... 依此類推。 一個熟於此項技藝者當知道在Τ形墊G內形成一個具 有散射現象的表面需要該襯墊的端點具有如同是該模體Μ 內部表面的形狀。例如說,若是後方的模體形成一個內凹 的圓環面,則該Τ形墊G的一端就必須是具有一個互補式 的外凸設計,以可容置該模體而不會產生洩漏情形。 在製作透鏡上係具有兩種方式:其一係爲直接的聚合 化,其二則是對半成品的透鏡產生聚合化。對直接聚合化 的程序而言,位在頂部的模體係予以移開,而後則是在該 模體內部的凹陷內放入一個管體,以對其注入該單體。其 後的程序則是將該頂部的模體放置於吻合該Τ形墊的位置 上,如此多餘的單體則會被擠出,並排出其中的氣泡。由 兩個拋光了的模體以及該襯墊所形成的容器形成了當透鏡 於保存時的形狀。此種習用的系統所具有的缺點係包括了 處理、事後所產生的雜亂以及在單體上的浪費。同時,在 該容器內亦有可能仍存有某些的氣泡,而這些氣泡則有可 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注意Ϋ項再填窝本頁) *- ' ·!!---訂----— — •線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 A7 401522 _B7____ I五、發明說明() 能會破壞形成的透鏡。此外’這一程序需要密集的勞力’ 並且常可能是在勞力相當便宜的國家來完成此一程序。 在該頂部的模體覆蓋在該T形墊上後’爲了保存該單 體,充塡了的襯墊總成係儲放在格架上’並取置在一個烤 爐內達1 4到1 6個小時,以進行一個控制溫度的循環程 序,以達到精準的聚化程度。而在此一冗長的保存程序完 成後,該襯墊總成係被予以移開,並將該透鏡從該模體之 間予以移出。使用直接聚化程序所製成的透鏡尙需要一些 完成的手續,其則諸如是邊緣的修裁、消除鑄造時應力的 退火、以肉眼檢視有無缺陷的透鏡,以及使用一種焦距儀 來檢視透鏡的倍率。一旦該透鏡完成後,其則會加以包裝 以準備運送到零售商或者是裝設在鏡架上,以備顧客選購 之用。 第二個程序係爲對一個透鏡的半成品進行聚合化,以 產生一種爲人所熟知的“半成品”透鏡。不同於直接聚合 的透鏡,該半成品的透鏡係具有一個內凹部,其係爲在儲 放的程序完成後,其未完成且浮出的邊緣。因此,其並不 是形成僅需要幾個最後的完成手續即可架設在眼鏡上的透 鏡,該半成品的透鏡僅具有一個由一個模體形成的面,而 其另一面則是在該透鏡經過儲放的程序後由機械所完成。 依此,該半成品的透鏡係由數個階段來完成者,也就是說 ’其一面是由一個模體來完成者,而另一面則是在經過儲 放的程序後而由一個機械來完成者。由該模體所完成之透 鏡的面通常是爲前方的球面,而其則不論是有或沒有增加 _ 12 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297公爱) &quot;* ---------訂---------線- (諳先閲讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 倍率。 半成品透鏡之未完成的邊緣通常是使用如同是玻璃透 鏡相同的方法並藉由一種特殊的車床或是一種刨齒機來完 成者,但是其他的硏磨劑亦可加以使用,以達到相同的目 的。聚合的透鏡係裝設在一個圓形的架子上,而其面部則 是由一種鑽石硏磨輪來加以硏磨完成。其曲率則是由該鑽 石硏磨輪相對於該透鏡的位置以及角度来控制者。而其表 面則是由適當的面部拋光工具來進行磨平以及拋光的程序 。金屬的工具係用於磨平以及拋光之用者,其每一面係均 具有其個別的工具者。數種不同的工具需要用來完成透鏡 表面的處理的。半成品的透鏡通常是儲放起來,並在需要 時,則再以機械來加工,例如是一名顧客對於透鏡具有特 定的需求時。 半成品透鏡,而不是直接聚化透鏡是使用於相當強力 的透鏡上的,其則諸如是aphakic透鏡或是具有高圓柱形 倍率的透鏡。這些強力的透鏡無法使用直接聚化的方式來 製成,因爲在其中央以及邊緣之間所存在之厚度差將會產 生極大的應力,而此應力則會以T形墊而將模體予以破壞 掉。 另一個造半成品透鏡的原因是因爲顧各需要的是多種 不同式樣的透鏡,而此種情況是無法從事大量生產者。例 如’某種特定的需求可能會需要在一個透鏡的前方表面具 有某些強化的倍率,而在透鏡的背面具有散射特性者則可 設置在不同特性的透鏡之內的。也就是說,強化倍率的部 _ 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 2Si7公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) -I^---ίΊΙ—訂· — ! 線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 ._ B7 五、發明說明() 份必須要作如此的安排,如此扁平的部份才可以成爲水平 ,然而,由於每個人其眼角膜的長形部份均各自不同,所 以散射的表面亦是彼此不同。而在此技藝內熟於此項工藝 者當可瞭解到,對於一個特定的強化倍率以及一個具有不 同特性之具有散射背面的透鏡而言,其間存在著許多不同 的交互組合。大量生產具有無窮變化的透鏡而言是不可實 施的,而也因此,零售商通常是購買半成品透鏡,而售出 之前加工以磨製具有散射特性的背面即可。 發明槪述 本發明克服了習用技藝中的缺失,並且在透鏡的形成 上產生了史無前例的革命。尤其地,本發明係使用了一種 可用來製成具有所有倍率以及幾何形狀透鏡的襯墊,而不 似習用的T形墊,其係僅可形成一種特定的透鏡。本發明 亦包括了一種使用自動化來產生透鏡的裝置以及方法β甚 且,本發明係包括了一種用來在如同是昔日技藝中所需要 之片段時間內保存以及形成透鏡的方法。此外,本發明係 尙包括了可將保存了的透鏡由用來形成透鏡的模體中予以 分離的裝置以及方法。 本發明所製作的襯墊是設計成可使得前方模體或/及 後方模體以可移動的方式而設置在其孔洞之內者。而在這 兩個模體中,至少有一個模體係以相對於另一個模體軸向 的方向而移動至一個預定且是和該模體分離開之軸向距離 。每一個分開的距離是對應於一個別透鏡的倍率。本發明 所製作且不同於往日的Τ形墊的襯墊亦可接受具有不同表 14 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ,裝---------訂---------線 I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 4015S2 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 面的不同模體(例如是球形或是散射形),來製作所需要 之透鏡的表面。由於一種襯墊是可用來製作並形成不同透 鏡的各種倍率,以及其表面,所以本發明的襯墊實可稱之 爲“萬月用襯墊”。 此外,凡是熟於此項技藝者均知,習用的T形墊係以 —個固定的距離來固定並維持該模體,而這就會產生了一 個問題,其就是當單體儲存時,其體積會縮小1 0到1 5 個百分比。而且由於在使用T形墊時,該模體係處於固定 不動的,所以單體的縮水情形會在透鏡的內部產生應力作 用,以致於有時亦需要退火的動作。相對而言,本發明的 襯墊係藉由可讓模體於單體體積儲存並縮水的情形產生時 ,得以作軸向的位移來減少應力的產生。因此,對使用本 發明的襯墊所製成的透鏡而言,其通常不需要有退火的動 作的。 本發明的鑄造方法係包括對至少兩個彼此間係以旋轉 以及軸向相對的模體中的一個加以固定,如此,一個具有 正確厚度以及倍率的透鏡才會在其之間形成。也就是說, 本發明並不是依賴襯墊的設計來製定透鏡的尺度,而是使 用自的化的技術,其係包括了有現行具有精確容差的控制 裝置來將模體予以在該襯墊內以彼此間距離適當的軸向距 離來加以定位而達成者。本發明亦包括了使用自動化的技 術來將該模體以相對於另一個模體的方式加以旋轉,以藉 此而可旋轉至所需要的方向,例如,該圓環體背面模體係 旋轉至和強化倍率而相吻合的位置。 15 ^---------1---------^ (請先閲讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 401522 A7 ___ B7 五、發明說明() 所需要的透鏡則係可藉由將單體注入至由該兩個模體 以及該襯墊的孔洞所界定的空間中而形成。該單體係藉由 一根針而注入的,而不是將該單體以傾倒的方式而注入至 該空間內者,爾後則在當該後方模體係固定在該襯墊之上 時,則將多餘的單體予以去除。本發明所使用的塡充方法 可大量的減少單體浪費的量,並可降低氣泡在透鏡內形成 的機率。 在使用了本發明的方法後,在製造透鏡方面來說是更 加的經濟以及更加的有效率了,因爲用於製造透鏡時所必 須要的模體可大量的減少其數量,而且在未能消除所有人 力的情況下,其亦可減少習用技藝中所需要的人力。 此外,使用本發明所製造的透鏡在和習用技藝所製造 的透鏡比較起來是更爲進步了。對一個經過切割和拋光處 理之半成品透鏡加工處理後表面的品質是較低於直接由玻 璃模體所製作出來的透鏡者。而任何一個熟於此項技藝者 都知道,工匠係花費了數個小時來對模體進行切割、硏磨 以及拋光以形成前方以及後方模體,並儘可能的使其完美 ,然而,一個由車床所切割而形成的透鏡則往往缺乏此種 精準度。 本發明係可在瞬間製作出任何軸向的透鏡,其係使用 一種通用的墊子設計,以求得一個特定的精準度。同時, 本發明所使用者係不同於習用技藝系統般,其係不需要額 外的切割或是任何透鏡形成的手續。其原因是一旦使用本 發明的方法來儲存透鏡時,其即已是爲一個成熟的產品了 16 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I 11 -裝!— II 訂·!------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() ,而不同於習用技藝中之半成品透鏡。也因此’本發明係 較習用技藝來得更爲快速且便宜。 本發明亦較習用技藝在儲放透鏡時所使用的時間是大 爲減少的。如上所述者,習用技藝在切割透鏡時’完全係 依靠該透鏡的設計而可能會需要高達14個小時或以上的 時間。本發明所具有的方法係爲一個單一的步驟,其則係 經由一個根據本發明設計的一種通用的墊子。事實上,在 經過此種方式所製作出來的透鏡係可在大約一分鐘後即可 加以儲存。 本發明另一方面則是在提供一種可將儲存的透鏡由該 模體中分離的方法以及裝置,其係包括了有將一種諸如是 二氧化碳的流體予以導流至該透鏡和該模體相交的界面》 具有低於模體-透鏡-模體之夾A式體的溫度的氣體會造 成元件收縮。形成該透鏡的聚合物以及玻璃模體因爲各具 有其各別的熱膨脹係數,故而收縮時亦會造成不同的收縮 度。而因爲這種不同的收縮度,故其係可將模體和該透鏡 的各面間所存在的結合關係予以破壞。本發明這一方面的 技術係較之於習用技藝而言是更加的進步的,因爲其常需 要實質上的將各元件予以拉離開互相的結合關係》 本發明所使用的方法係可使得透鏡快速的製成,以符 合特定的需求。就透鏡製成的速度而言,不論其曲率或是 形狀,在和習用的技藝相較之下是大量的減少了。例如, 習用技藝的系統係可讓商人得以在一個小時之內即能出售 透鏡’但這情況祇可能發生在該種透鏡係爲一種標準之儲 17 (請先《讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Ί------— ^---------^ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 401522 五、發明說明( 存的透鏡。而這也就是說,所謂的“一個小時服務”若是 顧客的需求是爲一種具有強化曲率之環狀體透鏡的話就不 可能實現了。在此種情況下,習用技藝的方式則就需要商 人使用一種在其前方表面具大強化曲率之半成品透鏡,並 將其後方表面以車床切割成爲所需要環狀體的形式。就一 個熟於此項技藝者而言,在使用一個車床時是需要相當的 時間的,並且,是無法提供那種所謂“一小時服務”的政 策的。在比較下,本發明所使用的方法係可讓一個透鏡得 以在少於三十分鐘的時間內形成以及儲放,其係較諸於零 售商形成限量透鏡者爲快,同時,亦較之於使用一種半成 品來形成透鏡時快了有數天之多。 本發明的另一個目的係可使得醫生得以在辦公室內製 成其所開立之透鏡的機會,而病人祇需要等待一段相當短 的時間。由於能供應透鏡形成的時間,以及短暫的等待時 間’由商業的角度來看,此種對病人/顧客之“一步驟” 式購物模式的選擇是爲謹慎的。因此,病人得以從眼睛的 檢查後’等待大約三十分鐘後,再載著特別爲其所製作的 眼鏡而離開診所。 圖式簡要說明: 第1圖.係爲習用T形塾子的剖視圖; 第2圖:係爲本發明階梯形墊子的剖視圖; · ·, 第3圖:係爲本發明之一種直立壁墊子的剖視圖,其 中所顯示的是在該墊子內部的埠; 第4圖:係爲模體以及墊子的分解剖視圖,其中’該 本紙張尺度適用令國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱A7 401522 B7____ V. Description of the invention () Prayer of invention: (Jing first read the note on the back before filling in this page) The present invention includes a device and method for lens casting and a gasket for lens casting . The present invention also includes a method for storing a casted lens, and an apparatus and method for separating the stored lens from a mold used to form the lens. Conventional background introduction: Glasses or lenses must be able to reflect a person's symptoms, which is just like a person's morphological and psychological situation. The lens used for spectacles is made of a transparent material, which is usually glass or plastic, and the size and shape of the lens is to produce the desired effect, that is, the light can be applied to the lens. Focus into a person's eyes to make them look better. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, this type of lens system has a fairly perfect geometry, and this geometry determines its optical characteristics. The shape of each lens can be determined by three aspects: (1) the curvature of its two sides; (its thickness at the center and edges; and (3) its diameter. Both sides of a lens can have completely different geometries, and It includes the following shapes: spherical, cylindrical, toroidal, plano-concave, aspheric (commonly elliptical), and other newer shapes. For example, a lens table follows its different axis The local system can have a fixed radius, so that the surface can be geometrically symmetrical, and this surface is a spherical surface that is well known to us. The surface of a spherical lens reflects a part of a spherical shape, And all the meridians have the same radius of curvature. This spherical surface is either convex or concave. 7 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) ^ 〇US2 A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention () In other words, the surface of the lens can have two different axes, each of which has its own radius of curvature, so that the surface of the lens can present several What is symmetry. A surface with astigmatism is an example of a geometrically symmetric surface 'and is characterized by having one of the _ main meridians and a radius of curvature different from each other. It has a maximum The meridian of the radius of curvature is called the "axis", and the meridian with a smaller radius of curvature is called the "vertical axis". The surface of a lens with a large scattering phenomenon usually has a cylindrical surface and a ring Shaped surfaces. A flat concave surface and an aspherical surface are examples of other lens surfaces used in well-known techniques. For a cylindrical surface, the main part along its axis The meridian has an infinite radius of curvature, such as flat or straight, and the radius of curvature of the vertical axis has the same radius as a circular circle. A concave cylindrical surface The system can accommodate a cylinder on its surface in a complementary manner, while a convex surface is similar to the outer surface of the cylinder. The ring-shaped surface is similar to a convex-shaped transverse surface, that is, it has the shape of a tire inner tube. Therefore, a convex-shaped surface is similar to a cylindrical surface, but its meridional direction The axis is curved, not a straight line like a cylinder. The vertical axis or meridian on a convex surface has a radius of curvature that is less than the radius of the axis. For a spherical and cylindrical surface In terms of a convex surface, it can be convex by having an outer surface with a circular shape, or it can also be by having an inner surface with a circular shape. 8 (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again) Order --------- line · Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives The paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 401522 at B7 5 , Description of the invention () and become concave. A surface with a scattering phenomenon is used for a person with a scattering phenomenon, and its cornea is oval 'instead of a normal circle. The direction of the long part of the cornea is not the same for every person with a scattering phenomenon. For example, one person may have an axis of 5 degrees, the other person may have 30 degrees', while the other person may have other orientations. The orientation of the axis of the lens surface must match the orientation of the corneal elongated portion. Different lens surfaces can be used in combination. Generally speaking, the front surface of a lens is spherical, while the rear surface can be spherical, cylindrical, or circular. Also, the front surface may be a flat surface. The ultimate combination of various surfaces at a lens is determined by its optical characteristics, its intended use, and its external shape. In addition to shape, thickness is also an important factor in lens characteristics. The glass or plastic used to form the lens is an important factor in the thickness of the lens. Because of its light weight, density, refractive index, and anti-collision properties, many lenses today are made of plastic. Examples of products made from plastic include methyl methacrylate (a thermoplastic resin, usually referred to by its trademark "Plexiglas" or "Perspex"), and carbohydrates, also commonly referred to as CR 39. C R 3 9 is the most popular material used today to make lenses, in part because all lenses used in eye optics can be made from this material. C R 3 9 is a petroleum refining product of polybasic lipids, which belongs to the family of polymerizable thermoplastic resins. At the time of manufacture, one of 9 paper sizes can be obtained from CR 3 9 in accordance with the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling in this page) ί ----- -Order! --- Line. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 4015 ^ 2 _______B7___: _ 5. Description of the invention () Single unit. This monomer is a clear liquid, which has the viscosity of glycerin, and can still maintain its liquid state when refrigerated, but gradually hardens after several months at room temperature. When forming a lens, the single liquid system is stored in a container defined by two molds and a gasket. Once the single system is placed in the container, it will form a hardened polymerized lens and will have the shape of the mold. The glass mold used to make the polymerized lens is an important factor in the manufacture of the c R 3 9 lens. It is not only because the mold forms the correct lens shape according to the required optical characteristics, but also because the surface quality of the finished lens depends on the correctness of the mold, because the surface of the lens is an internal surface of the mold Full copy. According to this, the surface inside the mold must be prepared in a very precise way, and after manufacturing, it is hardened by heating to form a type of double focus or triple focus lens that can resist the limitation of the polymerization process. The front phantom magnification can also be used to form a lens. This phantom magnification includes a section of an inwardly concave curve formed by cutting the recessed half of the phantom to form the phantom magnification on the front surface of the lens. The curve in this section also forms a convex surface at the distal end, and a more convex surface for reading magnification. As described above, the liquid single system is placed in a place consisting of two phantoms and a pad. The formed container is formed into a lens. As seen in the cross-sectional view shown in Figure 1, the well-known pad is generally called a T-shaped pad G, which has two holes and two complementary ^ ---- -.--— j ^ i! ---- line · {Guess first read the note on the back of the odd father item and then fill in the nest page) The consumer cooperation of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Printing «01522 A7 — &quot; 1- --—— --_________ V. Invention Description () Method and individually accommodate a motif M at its internal endpoint. Different T-shaped pads G are used to form different lens magnifications, because each τ-shaped pad G will form a pre-formed shaft that is tied between two phantoms M to separate it. In other words, a T-shaped pad G will farther away the phantom to form a lens with a higher magnification. In comparison with each other, another T-shaped pad G is used to form a Lenses with lower magnification. According to this, the manufacturer must maintain separate T-shaped pads up to + 2 lenses, the other is up to-3 lenses, the other is up to 4 lenses ... and so on. A person skilled in the art knows that forming a surface having a scattering phenomenon in the T-shaped pad G requires that the end points of the pad have a shape like the inner surface of the phantom M. For example, if the rear phantom forms a concave torus, one end of the T-shaped pad G must have a complementary convex design to accommodate the phantom without leakage. . There are two ways to make lenses: one is direct polymerization, and the other is polymerization of semi-finished lenses. For the direct polymerization process, the mold system on the top is removed, and then a tube is placed in the depression inside the mold body to inject the monomer into it. The subsequent procedure is to place the top phantom on the position that fits the T-shaped pad, so that the excess monomer will be squeezed out and the bubbles in it will be discharged. The container formed by the two polished phantoms and the gasket forms the shape when the lens is stored. Disadvantages of this conventional system include processing, subsequent mess, and waste on the monomer. At the same time, there may still be some air bubbles in the container, and these air bubbles may be in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) for this paper size (please read the note on the back first) Items are refilled on this page) *-'· !! --- Order ---- — — • • Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 401522 _B7____ I V. Description of the invention () Can damage the formation Lens. In addition, 'this process requires intensive labor' and often this process may be done in a country where labor is relatively cheap. After the top phantom is covered on the T-shaped pad, 'in order to save the monomer, the filled pad assembly is stored on a grid' and placed in an oven for 14 to 16 Hours to perform a temperature-controlled cycle program to achieve a precise degree of polymerization. After this lengthy storage procedure is completed, the gasket assembly is removed and the lens is removed from between the phantoms. Lenses made using the direct polymerization process require some completed procedures, such as trimming the edges, annealing to eliminate stress during casting, inspecting the lens for defects with the naked eye, and inspecting the lens using a focal length meter. Magnification. Once the lens is complete, it is packaged for shipment to a retailer or mounted on a frame for customer purchase. The second procedure is to polymerize the semi-finished product of a lens to produce a well-known "semi-finished" lens. Unlike the direct polymerized lens, this semi-finished lens system has an indentation which is an unfinished and floating edge after the storage process is completed. Therefore, it is not a lens that can be mounted on spectacles with only a few final procedures. The semi-finished lens has only one surface formed by a phantom, and the other surface is where the lens is stored. After the procedure is completed by the machinery. According to this, the semi-finished lens is completed by several stages, that is, 'one side is completed by a phantom, and the other side is completed by a machine after the storage process. . The surface of the lens completed by this phantom is usually the front spherical surface, whether it is added or not. 12 This paper size applies the Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G X 297 public love) &quot; * --------- Order --------- line- (谙 Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A7 B7 Fifth, the description of the invention () magnification. The unfinished edge of a semi-finished lens is usually completed by the same method as a glass lens and by a special lathe or a gear planer, but other honing agents can also be used to achieve the same purpose. . The polymerized lens is mounted on a round frame, while the face is honed by a diamond honing wheel. Its curvature is controlled by the position and angle of the diamond honing wheel relative to the lens. The surface is smoothed and polished by a suitable facial polishing tool. Metal tools are used for smoothing and polishing. Each side has its own tool. Several different tools are needed to complete the surface of the lens. Semi-finished lenses are usually stored and processed by machinery when needed, for example when a customer has specific needs for the lens. Semi-finished lenses, rather than direct condensing lenses, are used on fairly powerful lenses, such as aphakic lenses or lenses with high cylindrical power. These powerful lenses cannot be made by direct polymerization, because the thickness difference between the center and the edges will cause great stress, and this stress will destroy the phantom with a T-shaped pad Off. Another reason for making a semi-finished lens is because Gu needs a variety of different lens types, which is impossible for a large number of producers. For example, a certain requirement may require some enhanced magnification on the front surface of a lens, and those with scattering characteristics on the back of the lens may be placed in lenses with different characteristics. In other words, the department of strengthening the magnification _ 13 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 2Si7 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) -I ^ --- ίΊΙ —Order · —! Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the Consumers’ Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by 401522 A7 ._ B7 V. Invention Description () must be arranged in this way It can be horizontal, however, because the long parts of the cornea of each person are different, the scattering surfaces are also different from each other. Those skilled in this art should know that there are many different combinations of interactions for a specific enhancement magnification and a lens with a scattering backside with different characteristics. Mass production of lenses with infinite variation is impractical, and as a result, retailers usually buy semi-finished lenses and just process them to grind the back with scattering properties. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention overcomes the shortcomings of conventional techniques and has created an unprecedented revolution in the formation of lenses. In particular, the present invention uses a gasket that can be used to make lenses with all magnifications and geometries, instead of the conventional T-pad, which can form only one specific lens. The present invention also includes an apparatus and method for producing lenses using automation β. Furthermore, the present invention includes a method for preserving and forming a lens for a period of time as required in the past. In addition, the present invention includes an apparatus and a method for separating a stored lens from a mold body for forming the lens. The cushion produced by the present invention is designed so that the front phantom and / or the rear phantom can be movably disposed in the holes thereof. Among the two phantoms, at least one of the phantoms moves in a direction relative to the axial direction of the other phantom to a predetermined axial distance separated from the phantom. Each separate distance corresponds to the magnification of a different lens. The pads made by the present invention and different from the T-shaped pads of the past can also accept different sheets. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). --Order --------- Line I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy 4015S2 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Different modes on the side Body (such as spherical or diffuse) to make the surface of the required lens. Since a kind of gasket can be used to make and form various magnifications of different lenses, as well as its surface, the gasket of the present invention can be called a "universal gasket". In addition, anyone skilled in this art knows that the conventional T-shaped pad is used to fix and maintain the phantom at a fixed distance, and this will cause a problem. When the monomer is stored, its The volume will be reduced by 10 to 15 percentages. In addition, when the T-shaped pad is used, the mold system is fixed, so the shrinkage of the monomer will cause a stress in the lens, so that an annealing operation is sometimes required. In contrast, the gasket of the present invention can reduce the generation of stress by allowing the phantom to be stored in the volume of the monomer and shrunk when it is generated. Therefore, for lenses made using the gasket of the present invention, there is usually no need for annealing. The casting method of the present invention includes fixing one of at least two phantoms which are rotationally and axially opposed to each other, so that a lens having the correct thickness and magnification is formed therebetween. That is to say, the present invention does not rely on the design of the pad to determine the size of the lens, but uses a self-made technology, which includes the current control device with accurate tolerance to place the phantom on the pad It is achieved by positioning within an appropriate axial distance from each other. The invention also includes the use of automated technology to rotate the phantom relative to another phantom so as to be able to rotate to the desired direction, for example, the ring back mold system is rotated to and Enhance the magnification and match the position. 15 ^ --------- 1 --------- ^ (Please read the note on the back before filling in this page) The paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Consumption cooperation by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed 401522 A7 ___ B7 V. Description of the invention () The required lens can be injected by the monomer into the two phantoms and the pad Formed in the space defined by the holes. The single system is injected through a needle, instead of pouring the monomer into the space in a pouring manner, and then when the rear mold system is fixed on the pad, the Excess monomer is removed. The filling method used in the present invention can greatly reduce the amount of wasted monomers, and can reduce the probability of bubbles forming in the lens. After using the method of the present invention, it is more economical and efficient in manufacturing lenses, because the phantom necessary for manufacturing lenses can be greatly reduced, and it cannot be eliminated. In the case of all manpower, it can also reduce the manpower required for customary skills. In addition, lenses manufactured using the present invention are more advanced than lenses manufactured using conventional techniques. The surface quality of a semi-finished lens processed by cutting and polishing is lower than that of a lens made directly from a glass phantom. Anyone skilled in this art knows that the artisan department spent hours cutting, honing, and polishing the phantom to form the front and back phantoms, and to make it as perfect as possible. However, one by Lenses cut by lathes often lack this precision. The present invention can make any axial lens in an instant. It uses a universal pad design to obtain a specific accuracy. At the same time, the user of the present invention is different from the conventional technology system in that it does not require additional cutting or any lens forming process. The reason is that once the method of the present invention is used to store the lens, it is already a mature product. 16 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) I 11-Pack! — II Order! ------ Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (), which is different from the semi-finished lens in the conventional technology. Therefore, the present invention is faster and cheaper than conventional techniques. The present invention also greatly reduces the time used to store the lens compared to conventional techniques. As mentioned above, the conventional technique for cutting a lens depends entirely on the design of the lens and may take up to 14 hours or more. The method of the present invention is a single step, which is performed via a universal mat designed according to the present invention. In fact, lenses made in this way can be stored in about a minute. Another aspect of the present invention is to provide a method and a device for separating a stored lens from the phantom, which includes a method for guiding a fluid such as carbon dioxide to the lens and the phantom to intersect. Interface >> Gases with a temperature lower than that of the phantom-lens-phantom A-type body will cause the element to shrink. Since the polymer forming the lens and the glass phantom each have their own respective thermal expansion coefficients, they also cause different degrees of shrinkage when they shrink. Because of this different degree of contraction, it can destroy the bonding relationship existing between the phantom and the various faces of the lens. The technology of this aspect of the present invention is more advanced than the conventional technique, because it often needs to substantially pull the components away from each other. The method used in the present invention can make the lens fast Made to meet specific needs. In terms of the speed at which the lens is made, regardless of its curvature or shape, it is greatly reduced compared to conventional techniques. For example, a system of customary techniques allows a merchant to sell a lens within an hour ', but this can only happen if the lens system is a standard storage17 (please read the “Cautions on the back before filling Page) Ί ------— ^ --------- ^ Printed on paper by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 401522 V. Description of the invention (existing lens. And this means that the so-called "one-hour service" is not possible if the customer's demand is a ring lens with enhanced curvature. In this case The practice method requires a businessman to use a semi-finished lens with a large enhanced curvature on the front surface and cut the rear surface into the form of the required ring body with a lathe. As far as a person skilled in the art is concerned It takes considerable time when using a lathe, and the so-called "one-hour service" policy cannot be provided. In comparison, the method used in the present invention allows a transparent It can be formed and stored in less than thirty minutes, which is faster than a retailer forming a limited number of lenses, and at the same time, it is several days faster than using a semi-finished product to form a lens. Another object of the invention is to allow doctors the opportunity to make their opened lenses in the office, and patients only have to wait for a relatively short time. Due to the time it takes to form the lens, and the short waiting time From a business perspective, this “one-step” shopping model for patients / customers is chosen with caution. As a result, patients are able to 'wait for about thirty minutes after an eye examination before loading The spectacles produced leave the clinic. Brief description of the drawings: Figure 1 is a cross-sectional view of a conventional T-shaped rafter; Figure 2: is a cross-sectional view of a stepped cushion of the present invention; A cross-sectional view of an upright wall cushion of the present invention, in which the port inside the cushion is shown; FIG. 4 is a partial anatomical view of the phantom and the cushion, where 'this paper Order of the applicable national standard hog country (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 Kimiyoshi

^------—---------^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 401ίηζ Α7 - Β7 五、發明說明() 前方的模體係在其週邊界定了一個環狀的環; 第5圖:係在於顯示著本發明的一個總成工作站、機 械臂以及塡充站的立體圖; 第6圖:係在顯示設置在蓋體外側之總成工作站的頂 視圖; 第7圖:係爲該總成工作站之活塞向上時的側面剖視 圖, 第8圖:係爲第7圖的側面剖視圖,其中,該活塞是 向下者,同時亦顯示了一個鏡頭; 第9圖:係爲使用在本發明內一種徑向夾子的立體圖 第1 0圖:係爲使用在本發明內一種機械臂的側視圖 第1 1圖:係爲此系統的頂視圖,其中所顯示者係該 機械臂移向一個塡充站,並且(在假想線的指示下),該 機械臂係由該總成工作站中拾起了該墊子以及該徑向夾子 ,爾後再度的移向另一個塡充站; 第1 2圖:係爲該塡充站的前視圖; 第1 3圖:係爲由第1 2圖中1 3 — 1 3線所取得之 塡充站的側面剖視圖,而其中係在當該透鏡形成的總成係 第一次抵達時所取之側面剖視圖; 第14圖:係爲在第13圖中所顯示之塡充站的側面 剖視圖,其中,當該塡充站開始塡充時,針係插入於該塾 子之內,而線性啓動器則係已將後方模體由該前方模體處 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) ----— — — —----0 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 予以移至正確的軸向分離距離位置處; 第1 5圖:係爲一個簡化了的剖視圖’且其中部份係 以示意圖來顯示一個UV儲放裝置係用來儲放形成於該總 成以及該塡充站的透鏡; 第1 6圖:係爲該分離裝置的立體圖’其中部份係以 示意圖來顯示本發明之如何將模體和儲放的透鏡予以分離 &gt; 第1 7 A圖:係爲該總成固定的剖視圖’其中’該吻 合的墊子係用於將該後方模體予以容置在其孔洞之內者; 以及 第1 7 B圖:係爲第1 7 A圖的剖視圖,其中,該後 方模體係使用該總成工作站而插入於該墊子之內者。 本發明的詳細說明: 本發明主要的是在藉由下列並不是在於限制性而是解 釋性的範例來加以解說,因爲各種不同的修飾和變化對那 些熟於此項技藝者而言是爲簡易思及以易於達成者。在本 說明書內以及申請專利範圍內的“一個”可能指的是在數 量上爲一或是更多者,其完全是依賴文內所使用的數量。 本發明的較佳實施例將在以圖式的解說下而·一一的敘述, 其中相似的數字代表著全文內相似的元件。 綜觀 請參看附圖所示之第2 -第1 7 B圖,本發明係包括 了一種透鏡的鑄造方法以及用於其中的襯墊。本發明同時 亦含括了用於儲存鑄造之透鏡的方法,以及一種用以將儲 20 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規^7〇 χ 297公爱) (靖先閱讀背面之注項再填寫本頁) 裝 — — 訂·—-------#6 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 _ B7__ 五、發明說明() 存之透鏡和用於鑄造透鏡之元件予以分離開的裝置和方法 〇 本發明之襯墊 本發明的襯墊2 0係可用於形成具有不同曲率的透鏡 ,不同於習用技藝中需要對每一個透鏡具有不同設計之襯 墊。請參看附圖所示之第2圖以及第3圖,本發明的襯墊 2 〇係具有一個第一端點2 2,一個相對的第二端點2 4 ,一個將該第一端點2 2和該第二端點2 4予以連結在一 起的本體部,以及一個經向或是軸向延伸的軸L »該襯墊 2 〇係具有一個外部表面2 6並且界定了一個在軸向上延 伸經由該襯墊2 0,且係位於其相對端點2 2、2 4之間 的孔洞3 0。該孔洞3 0形成了一個界定了該襯墊2 0之 經向軸L之界限的內部表面3 2。 該襯墊2 0的外部表面2 6最好是爲圓形或是環形( 如圖中第9圖所示者),如此該襯墊20之最佳實施例的 圖形則是爲管狀》雖說其係可以使用其他類形的形狀(例 如是橢圓形、多邊形或是其他非圓形的形狀),但圓形的 形狀在現有的技藝中就生產上的考慮、以及自動化的處理 而言仍是最好的形狀。 該襯墊2 0的孔洞3 0係可同時的容置—個前方檫髒 4 0以及一個後方模體5 0。同在附圖所示之第4圖中所 示者,該前方模體4 0係具有一個前方的表面4 2、一個 相對的後方表面4 4,以及一個邊緣4 6。該邊緣4 6的 形狀係和該孔洞3 0呈互補的形狀,故而其至少可容*於 21 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(2〗〇 X 297公釐) i绩先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Μ·· Μ 裝 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 該孔洞3 0內的一個部份之內,而該邊緣4 6以及該襯墊 2 0的內部表面3 2則可在其間形成防水的密封結構。 該後方模體5 0同樣地係具有個前方表面5 2、一個 相對的後方表面P5 4以及一個邊緣5 6。該邊緣5 6的形 狀係和該孔洞3 0呈互補的形狀,故而其至少可容置於該 孔洞3 0內的一個部份之內,而該邊緣5 6以及該襯墊2 0的內部表面3 2則可在其間形成防水的密封結構。由於 該襯墊2 0之最佳的形狀係如同在第9圖中所示之圓形, 故而該模體4 0、5 0亦最好是爲圓形,且係具有一個直 徑。當該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0係如同在附圖 之第2圖以及第3圖中所示之被共同的放置於該襯墊2 0 的孔洞3 0內時,整體的組合係稱之爲一個透鏡形成總成 1 0、一個透鏡形成結構或是爲一個透鏡鑄造殻體。 當該模體4 0、5 0係容置於該襯墊2 0之內時,一 個由該前方模體4 0的後方表面4 4、後方模體5 0的前 方表面5 2以及該襯墊2 0的內部表面3 2之間所界定的 空間於是形成了。也就是說,該模體4 0、5 0係在該孔 洞3 0之內彼此被安置在一個間隔開來的位置上,而也因 此,在其間會形成一個空間。此一稱之爲槽孔3 1的空間 在當一種透鏡形成的流體注入於該槽孔31之內並存放於 其間時,其最好是具備有足夠的厚度以形成所需要的透鏡 。該槽孔31亦在附圖所示之第4圖中以假想線來加以顯 示。 該透鏡形成流體最好是爲一種單體。最好的單體則係 22 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝-----„----^訂---------^ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 401522 ΚΙ —__________Β7__ — 五、發明說明() (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 由位在喬治亞州蒙若維郡的P.P.G.公司所製,且是以GR 4 2 4之商標販售者是爲最好。凡是熟於此項技藝者均知 ,其他現行技藝中之透鏡形成流體亦可使用於本發明之內 者。 本發明亦包括了一種可將該單體予以注入至該槽孔3 1之內的裝置。較佳的注入裝置係包括了一根注入針,而 其則會在以下的討論中予以詳加討論。本發明亦包括了一 種可在該襯墊2 0之外部表面2 6和該孔洞3 0之間提供 流體連通的裝置。較佳的供應連通的裝置係包括了一個和 該孔洞3 0相連通之排出針,藉此才可在該槽孔3 1內的 空氣和該外部表面2 6的外部間產生相連通的關係,因而 促進了該單體之注入至槽孔3 1以及該槽體4 0、5 0的 軸向運動。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 該前方模體4 0或是該後方模體5 0係可相對於其他 的模體而可在該孔洞3 0之內以軸向的方向而移動至模體 間複數個軸向間隔距離中的一個預定的距離處。每一個軸 向間隔距離的大小均是不同的,並且因此,形成在該槽孔 31內透鏡的大小亦會因爲每一個軸向間隔距離而有不同 。在以下將會有更詳細的說明的是,本發明的塡充工作站 使用一種電腦次系統(或是一個諸如是電腦或是微處理器 之控制器),機械臂以及線性啓動器或是飼輻馬達來將該 後方槽體5 0以相對於該前方槽體4 0的方式而定位在該 孔洞3 0內的一個預定的位置處。由於自動化中係包括了 現行技藝之運動控制裝置,且其係具有精確的容差,所以 23 本紙張尺度適用_國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(2〗0 X 297公董) A7 401522 _ B7___ 五、發明說明() 本發明所製造透鏡的品質在和習用的透鏡相比較下是更爲 改良了。 請參閱本發明所附圖式之第2圖,該襯墊2 0的孔洞 3 0在靠近其第一端點2 2處係具有一個第一直徑,其會 沿著該孔洞3 0長度的一部份而遞減。該第一直徑的尺度 係可以互補的方式而容置該前方模體40的邊緣46者。 該襯墊2 0之孔洞3 0在靠近其第二端點2 4處係具有一 個定値的第二直徑,其係會沿著該孔洞3 0長度的一部份 而延伸者,其中,該第二直徑的尺度係可以互補的方式而 容置該後方模體5 0的邊緣5 6者。 一個過渡區3 4係存在於該孔洞3 0之內,且係在該 第一直徑和該第二直徑之間者。該過渡區3 4係包括了一 個插入階梯3 6,或是脊,藉此而可該前方模體4 0予以 定位在該孔洞3 0內的一個固定且係爲已知的位置處。該 過渡區3 4係形成於該襯墊2 0的內部表面,且係位在該 第一直徑以及該第二直徑的交接處。該前方模體4 0係以 滑動的方式而沿著該襯墊2 0的內部表面3 2滑動,直徑 1 其係和該過渡區3 4的階梯3 6接觸爲止。該前方模體4 ! 0之後方表面4 4的一部份且係靠近於該邊緣4 6處的形 | 狀係可以互補的方式而和該過渡區3 4相接觸,以和其形 I 成實質上係爲防漏的結構。也就是說,該過渡區3 4係具 4 有一種幾何學上的角度’而該前方模體4 0亦係具有一種 | 相對應且係和該過渡區3 4的一部份相吻合的角度邊緣4 % 6 ’如此,而可形成防止容置在該孔洞3 〇內部的單體滲^ ----------------- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs 401ίηζ Α7-Β7 V. Description of Invention () The front mold system defines a ring-shaped ring on its periphery; Figure 5: It is a perspective view showing an assembly workstation, a robot arm and a charging station of the present invention; Figure 6: It is shown in a display setting Top view of the assembly workstation on the outside of the cover; Figure 7 is a side sectional view of the piston of the assembly workstation when it is facing upward, Figure 8 is a side sectional view of Figure 7 where the piston is downward Figure 9 is a perspective view of a radial clip used in the present invention. Figure 10 is a side view of a mechanical arm used in the present invention. Figure 11: This is a top view of the system, in which the robot arm is moved to a filling station, and (under the direction of the imaginary line), the robot arm picks up the mat and the path from the assembly workstation To the clip, and then move to another filling station again; Fig. 12 is a front view of the Yongchong Station; Fig. 13 is a side sectional view of the Yanchong Station obtained from lines 1 3-13 in Fig. 12, and of which The lens-forming assembly is a side cross-sectional view taken at the first arrival; FIG. 14 is a side cross-sectional view of the charging station shown in FIG. 13, where when the charging station starts charging, The needle is inserted into the mule, and the linear actuator has the rear phantom from the front phantom. The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297). --- -— — — —---- 0 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Move to the correct axial separation distance position; Figure 15: Department It is a simplified cross-sectional view 'and some of them are shown in schematic diagrams. A UV storage device is used to store the lenses formed in the assembly and the charging station; Figure 16 is the separation device. Part of the 'three-dimensional view' is a schematic diagram showing how the present invention divides the phantom and the stored lens &gt; Figure 17A is a sectional view of the assembly fixed 'wherein' the mat is used to accommodate the rear phantom within its hole; and Figure 17B: FIG. 17A is a sectional view, in which the rear mold system is inserted into the cushion using the assembly workstation. Detailed description of the present invention: The present invention is mainly explained by the following examples, which are not restrictive but explanatory, because various modifications and changes are easy for those skilled in the art. Think of those who are easy to reach. "A" in this specification and in the scope of patent application may refer to one or more in number, which is totally dependent on the number used in the text. The preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described one by one by way of illustration, in which similar numbers represent similar elements throughout the text. Take a look at Figures 2-17B of the drawings. The present invention includes a method for casting a lens and a gasket used therein. The present invention also includes a method for storing cast lenses, and a method for storing 20 paper sizes in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ 7〇χ 297 public love) (Jing Xian read the note on the back) Please fill in this page again.) Packing — — Ordering · ———----- # 6 Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A7 _ B7__ V. Description of the invention () Lens stored and used for casting lenses Apparatus and method for separating components. The gasket of the present invention The gasket 20 of the present invention can be used to form lenses having different curvatures, which is different from the conventional technique which requires a different design for each lens. Please refer to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 of the accompanying drawings. The pad 20 of the present invention has a first end point 2 2, an opposite second end point 2 4, and a first end point 2. 2 and the second end point 24 are connected to the body portion, and a warp or axially extending axis L »The pad 2 has an outer surface 26 and defines an axial extension It passes through the pad 20 and is a hole 30 located between its opposite ends 22, 24. The hole 30 forms an inner surface 32 which defines the boundary of the meridional axis L of the pad 20. The outer surface 26 of the pad 20 is preferably circular or ring-shaped (as shown in FIG. 9 in the figure), so the figure of the preferred embodiment of the pad 20 is tubular. The system can use other types of shapes (such as oval, polygon, or other non-circular shapes), but the circular shape is still the most important in terms of production considerations and automated processing in the existing technology. Good shape. The holes 30 of the pad 20 can be accommodated at the same time—a frontal viscera 40 and a rear phantom 50. As shown in the fourth figure shown in the drawing, the front phantom 40 has a front surface 4 2, an opposite rear surface 4 4, and an edge 46. The shape of the edge 46 is complementary to the shape of the hole 30, so it can hold at least 21 * This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 〖〇X 297mm) i Read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) Μ ·· Μ Installed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Consumer Cooperative 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The hole is within a part of 30 and the edge is 4 6 And the inner surface 32 of the gasket 20 can form a waterproof sealing structure therebetween. The rear phantom 50 also has a front surface 52, an opposite rear surface P54, and an edge 56. The shape of the edge 56 is complementary to the shape of the hole 30, so it can be accommodated in at least a part of the hole 30, and the inside surface of the edge 56 and the pad 20 32 can form a waterproof seal structure in between. Since the optimal shape of the gasket 20 is a circle as shown in Fig. 9, the phantoms 40 and 50 are also preferably circular and have a diameter. When the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 are placed together in the hole 30 of the pad 2 as shown in the second and third figures of the drawing, the whole The combination system is called a lens forming assembly 10, a lens forming structure, or a lens casting case. When the phantoms 40 and 50 are contained within the pad 20, a rear surface 4 4 of the front phantom 40, a front surface 5 2 of the rear phantom 50, and the pad The space defined between the interior surfaces of 2 0 2 is then formed. That is, the phantoms 40 and 50 are placed in a spaced apart position from each other within the hole 30, and therefore, a space is formed therebetween. This space, which is called the slot 31, is preferably provided with a sufficient thickness to form the required lens when a lens-forming fluid is injected into the slot 31 and stored therebetween. This slot 31 is also shown by a phantom line in the fourth figure shown in the drawing. The lens forming fluid is preferably a monomer. The best single unit is 22 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇x 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -^ Order --------- ^ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 ΚΙ —__________ Β7__ — V. Description of the invention () (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Manufactured by PPG in Monrovia County, Georgia and sold under the trademark GR 4 2 4. Anyone familiar with this technology knows that lens forming fluids in other current technologies may also be used. Those used in the present invention. The present invention also includes a device capable of injecting the monomer into the slot 31. A preferred injection device includes an injection needle, which will This is discussed in more detail in the following discussion. The present invention also includes a device that provides fluid communication between the outer surface 26 of the pad 20 and the hole 30. A preferred device for supplying communication includes An ejection pin communicating with the hole 30, so that it can be in the slot 31 The air and the outside of the outer surface 26 have a connected relationship, thereby promoting the axial movement of the monomer injection into the slot 31 and the slot 40 and 50. Consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The cooperative prints the front phantom 40 or the rear phantom 50, which can move relative to other phantoms in the axial direction within the hole 30 to a plurality of axial intervals between the phantoms. A predetermined distance among the distances. The size of each axial separation distance is different, and therefore, the size of the lens formed in the slot 31 will also be different for each axial separation distance. In the following It will be explained in more detail that the filling work station of the present invention uses a computer subsystem (or a controller such as a computer or a microprocessor), a robot arm, and a linear actuator or a spoke motor. The rear slot body 50 is positioned at a predetermined position in the hole 30 relative to the front slot body 40. Since the automation system includes the motion control device of the current technology, and it has accurate Tolerance, so 23 paper standards are applicable _ National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2〗 0 X 297 public directors) A7 401522 _ B7___ 5. Description of the invention () The quality of the lens produced by the present invention is in line with the conventional lens It is more improved in comparison. Please refer to the second drawing of the drawing of the present invention. The hole 30 of the pad 20 has a first diameter near its first end point 22, which will be along the It decreases along a part of the length of the hole 30. The dimension of the first diameter can accommodate the edge 46 of the front phantom 40 in a complementary manner. The hole 30 of the pad 20 is near the first. The two end points 24 have a fixed second diameter, which extends along a part of the length of the hole 30, wherein the dimensions of the second diameter can be accommodated in a complementary manner. The edges of the rear phantom 50 are 5-6. A transition zone 34 exists within the hole 30 and is between the first diameter and the second diameter. The transition zone 34 includes an insertion step 36, or a ridge, whereby the front phantom 40 can be positioned at a fixed and known position within the hole 30. The transition region 34 is formed on the inner surface of the pad 20 and is located at the intersection of the first diameter and the second diameter. The front phantom 40 slides along the inner surface 3 2 of the pad 20 in a sliding manner until the diameter 1 contacts the step 36 of the transition zone 34. The shape of the front phantom 4! 0 and a part of the rear surface 4 4 and close to the edge 4 6 | The shape system can contact the transition area 3 4 in a complementary manner to form the shape I It is essentially a leak-proof structure. In other words, the transition zone 3 4 has a geometric angle '4, and the front phantom 4 0 also has a | corresponding angle that coincides with a part of the transition zone 3 4 The edge 4% 6 'is so, and it can form a monomer to prevent the inside of the hole 30.

I I_____24 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(2!〇 X 297公爱)------- (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝----------^訂--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 漏的防漏結構。該過渡區3 4的角度係可相對於該內部表 面3 2而爲一直角,或者是相對於直角而傾斜2 0度或者 是更多的角度,而其最好的角度則是具有1 〇度的傾斜》 該過渡區3 4以及該前方模體4 0的邊緣4 6係可交互地 具有其他吻合的形狀,如此,才可以在其間形成一種防漏 的結構。 在這一個具體實施例中,該後方模體5 0係可沿著該 孔洞3 0的一部份而作軸向的位移,以可到達距該前方模 體4 0的一個預定的間隔距離處,而其則是在該過渡區3 4內的一個固定的位置。因爲本發明之該墊體2 0係設計 成使用自動技術者,所以該第二直徑係在沿著該孔洞3 0 的內部表面3 2,且係位在該過渡區3 4和該墊體2 0的 第二端點2 4之間而爲定値者。該後方模體5 0的直徑實 質上係和該第二直徑相同者,所以該後方模體5 0係可插 入於該孔洞3 0之內,並且以軸向的方向沿著其表面而滑 動到距離該前方模體4 0之一個預定的間隔距離處。如上 所述者,當該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0係均放置 在該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0內時*由該前方模體4 0以及該 後方模體5 0所共同界定的槽孔3 1,以及該墊體2 0的 內部表面3 2丨系可維持住一種流體,而其則諸如是流體單 體,而不致產生滲漏。 在另一種具有過渡區的墊體的形態中,該孔洞的第一 個直徑係可維持一個定値,且係由該墊體的第一端點處向 內移,爾後則突然的延伸,以形成一個靠近於該過渡區的 25 &gt;i\ I----^--------------1 ·. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁&gt; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 軸向延伸的間隙。該間隙的尺度係可以互補的方式來容置 該前方模體於其內部者。此種具體實施例係可以相似的方 式而將該前方模體予以固定在靠近於該過渡區處。也就是 說,當該前方模體係以軸向的方式而插入於該孔洞時,其 係可以弾性的方式而容置在該間隙之內,而能夠以固定且 係可分離的方式而貼近於該過渡區。 本發明之顯示於第3圖內的另種具體實施例係包括了 一個並不具有過渡區或是間隙的墊體2 0。反之,該第一 直徑係相等於該第二直徑,所以該孔洞3 0在其整個的長 度中係具有一個固定的直徑者。因此,相似於該後方模體 5 0之在該過渡區墊體內滑動定位的方式,該前方模體4 0以及/或是該後方模體5 0係以可移動的方式而定位在 此種直立壁墊體之內。凡是熟於此項技藝者均可瞭解到, ——個模體在另一個模體以軸向的方向而在該孔洞3 0之內 移動時仍可維持在一個預定的位置,且其係相似於該過渡 區的實施例。而另種方式則是該兩個模體4 0、5 0係可 以分別地以同時或是分別在不同的時間內來以相對於另一 方的方式而加以移動。該墊體2 0較佳的具體實施例同樣 地係具有一個靠近於其本身第二端點2 4的凹槽2 8,藉 此而可確保該塗體2 0可在透鏡形成的過程中保持在正確 的吻合位置。 在比較該過渡區以及具有直立壁的墊體具體實施例時 ,該過渡區墊體的缺點是一小部份的液體單體雖然不會滲 出該前方模體4 0之外,但會滲入並且散佈在該過渡區3 26 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐 I Μ-----r---- ^-----I---^ (諝先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 A7 -------B7______ 五、發明說明() 4以及該前方模體4 0之間。因此,當固化後的诱鏡-當 被由該墊體2 0中予以移出時-在其外部週緣處可能不很 “乾淨”,因此需要事後的切削處理,以將滲漏至該前方 模體4 0以及該過渡區3 4交接處的透鏡材料,而這地方 也是墊體2 0於再使用之前而必須要加以處理的。所 以’再次使用該過渡區墊體之具體實施例時,需要額外的 時間以及金錢,以用來處理固的透鏡以及/或是爲了 重新使用的目的而淸理該墊體2 0以及該前方模體4 0。 另一個缺點則是具有該過渡區3 4之墊體的使用次數,或 是使用壽限可能因爲在其上所作之淸理的工作而縮短了。 該過渡區墊體之具體實施例在一個自動化的系統中於使用 時是較簡單的,因爲該前方模體4 0係處在一個已姐的位 置,而該後方模體5 0則是以相對於該固定位置而以軸向 的方式移動至軸向的分離距離點。 雖然自動化對於直立壁之具體實施例而言是稍爲複雜 了些,但是使用此種墊體仍在長程來看是較爲便宜些,因 爲在淸理該前方模體以及該墊體時的花費實質上是降低了 許多。所以’具有直立壁的具體實施例是可具有較長的使 用壽限的。 請參看第土圖以及第三圖,本發明的每一個墊體2 〇 最好是具有少一個並且至多具有兩個形成於該墊體2 〇本 體部且係介於其外部表面2 6以及內部表面之間的填3 8 、3 9 °埠3 8、3 9係和該孔洞3 0而呈現流體相連通 之關係’尤其是和形成在該前方模體4 〇之後部表面4 4 27 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297公釐)*&quot;&quot;&quot;-------- (請先閱讀背面之注4事項再填寫本頁) 裝·! _ l· 11 l· 訂·!_!·^ Α7 Β7 五、發明說明() 、該後方模體5 0的前方表面5 2以及該墊體2 0之內部 表面3 2之間的槽孔3 1呈現流體相連通的關係。每一個 埠3 8、3 9的形狀係可在其內部容置一根針,所以該針 係和該槽孔3 1而呈現流體相連通的關係,而其本身則不 用插入於該孔洞3 0之內。該注入針係和一個埠(注入埠 3 8)而相互呈流體相連通的關係,而排出針則係和另一 個埠(排出璋3 9 )而呈現流體相連通的關係。也就是說 ,一個埠3 8係用於將該單體予以加入至該槽孔3 1之內 者,而另一個埠39則在當放置在注入之單體旁時,係用 於將在該槽孔3 1之內的空氣予以排出者。該排出埠3 9 亦可在該墊體2 0的外部以及該槽孔3 1之間提供流體相 互連通的關係,而可讓藉由軸向的且係以相對於彼此的方 式來移動該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0而造成之空 氣流動予以進入或是排出於該體積之外,其則完全是依賴 該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0之間的相互運動者。 最好的狀況是,該針係以平行於該墊體2 0之經向軸L的 方向且係相對於一個較傾斜的角度來穿入該墊體2 0進入 至個別的埠3 8、3 9之內。此種較小的角度以及平行於 該墊體2 0經向軸L之吻合的方式減少了該針的尖端和任 一個模體4 0 ; 5 0相接觸的可能。然而,較傾斜的角度 亦可垂直於經向軸L,而該墊體2 0仍然可以正常的工作 〇 埠3 8、3 9的設立在當該槽孔3 1相當小時是相當 有利的’例如,該前方模體4 0的後方表面係相當接近於 28 本紙張尺度適用中國躅豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公β ) &lt;if先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I _ · I--------r ---------^ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401532 A7 B7 五、 發明說明( 該後方模體5 0的前方表面5 2 °在這種狀況下’將注入 針插入於孔洞3 0之內一個或是係可以接觸兩個模體 」5 0同時兩個表面4 4、5 2。這種接觸可能傷害到一 個模體的表面,或是將一個模體予以移開’如此一來則該 逸鏡將不具有正確的尺寸,或者是在當該單體於注入至該 楢孔之內時而洩漏出來。 在該墊體2 0中設置一個穿越其中的孔來將位在該槽 孔內的空氣予以排出亦是大眾所週知者。也就是說’該槽 孔3 1係直接的和外界的空氣相連通,而不是藉由該埠3 9以及該注入針的協助而和外界的空氣產生連通者。 本發明墊體2 0之另一個特點則是該墊體的製成材料 。在所呈現出來的具體實施例中,一個爲大眾所需求的特 點是在於該墊體的製成材料是完全的和透鏡的形成流體而 相容者,如此則可避免該流體的聚合化。該墊體的製成材 料應避免含有諸如是“UV&quot;穩定劑以及抗氧化劑之抗氧 化劑基。一種“U V”穩定劑可過滤成爲單體,因爲該單 的反應機乎是和一種溶劑相同,並藉此可將該墊體之製 成材料的黏性予以抽出,並和該單體予以混合在一起,而 可將該透鏡於儲存時,其邊緣仍可保持溼潤。然而此種溼 潤度仍會造成擾,因爲其潛在地會將該單體予以黏附在 該塾體2 0以及該模體4 0、5 0上,而此種情況則在重 複使用前需要額外的淸洗,並且會增加操作上的費用。因 此’我們所需要的是一種可和光學單體相容且不會在儲存 時抗拒透鏡單體之聚合的彈性體。就本發明墊體的另一方 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ----^-----ί;?!--- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製I I_____24 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2! 〇X 297 public love) -------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Loading ----- ----- ^ Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Leak-proof structure. The angle of the transition zone 34 may be a straight angle relative to the inner surface 32, or may be inclined at an angle of 20 degrees or more with respect to a right angle, and the best angle is 10 degrees. The inclination of the transition zone 34 and the edge 4 6 of the front phantom 40 can alternately have other matching shapes, so that a leak-proof structure can be formed therebetween. In this specific embodiment, the rear phantom 50 is axially displaceable along a portion of the hole 30 to reach a predetermined distance from the front phantom 40. , And it is a fixed position within the transition zone 34. Because the pad body 20 of the present invention is designed to use an automatic technique, the second diameter is located on the inner surface 3 2 of the hole 30 along the transition zone 34 and the pad body 2 The second endpoint of 0 is between 2 and 4 as the setter. The diameter of the rear mold body 50 is substantially the same as the second diameter, so the rear mold body 50 can be inserted into the hole 30 and slide along the surface in the axial direction to A predetermined distance from the front phantom 40. As described above, when the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 are both placed in the holes 30 of the cushion body 20 * the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 The jointly defined slot 31 and the inner surface 3 2 of the pad body 20 can maintain a fluid, such as a single fluid, without causing leakage. In another form of a cushion body with a transition zone, the first diameter of the hole can maintain a fixed diameter, and it moves inward from the first end of the cushion body, and then suddenly extends to form A 25 close to the transition zone &gt; i \ I ---- ^ ------------- 1 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page> This The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The axially extending gap. The dimensions of the gap can accommodate the front phantom in a complementary manner. The inside. This specific embodiment can fix the front mold body close to the transition area in a similar manner. That is, when the front mold system is inserted into the hole in an axial manner. , Which can be contained in the gap in a natural manner, and can be close to the transition area in a fixed and detachable manner. Another specific embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. 3 includes A cushion body 20 that does not have a transition zone or gap. On the contrary, the first Is equal to the second diameter, so the hole 30 has a fixed diameter in its entire length. Therefore, similar to the sliding positioning of the rear phantom 50 in the transition zone cushion body, the The front phantom 40 and / or the rear phantom 50 are positioned in such an upright wall cushion body in a movable manner. Anyone skilled in this art can understand that-a phantom When the other phantom moves in the axial direction within the hole 30, it can still be maintained in a predetermined position, and it is similar to the embodiment of the transition zone. The other way is the two The phantoms 40 and 50 can be moved at the same time or separately at different times in a manner relative to the other. The preferred embodiment of the mat 20 also has a proximity A groove 28 at the second end point 24 of itself, thereby ensuring that the coating body 20 can maintain the correct anastomotic position during the lens formation process. In comparing the transition area and the pad with the upright wall The disadvantages of this transition zone cushion body are: Although a small part of the liquid monomer will not seep out of the front phantom 40, it will seep and spread in the transition zone 3 26 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm I Μ ----- r ---- ^ ----- I --- ^ (谞 Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 401522 A7 ------- B7______ V. Description of the invention ( ) 4 and the front phantom 40. Therefore, when the cured lens-when removed from the pad body 20-may not be very "clean" at its outer periphery, so it requires post-mortem The cutting process is performed to leak the lens material to the junction of the front phantom 40 and the transition zone 34, which is also the place where the pad 20 must be treated before reuse. Therefore, when the specific embodiment of the transition zone cushion body is used again, additional time and money are needed to process the fixed lens and / or to treat the cushion body 20 and the front mold for reuse purposes Body 4 0. Another disadvantage is that the number of uses of the cushion body with the transition zone 34, or the service life may be shortened due to the logical work performed on it. The specific embodiment of the transition zone cushion body is relatively simple to use in an automated system, because the front phantom 40 is in a position of sister, and the rear phantom 50 is relative At this fixed position, it moves axially to the axial separation distance point. Although automation is a little more complicated for the specific embodiment of the upright wall, the use of such a pad is still cheaper in the long run because of the cost of handling the front mold and the pad It is substantially reduced. Therefore, the embodiment having the upright wall may have a longer service life. Please refer to the drawings and the third drawing. Each pad body 2 of the present invention preferably has one less and at most two formed on the pad body 2 0 and interposed between the outer surface 26 and the inside thereof. The filling between the surfaces 3 8 and 39 °, the ports 3 8 and 3 9 and the holes 30 are in fluid communication with each other 'especially with the front surface 4 0 and the rear surface 4 4 27 paper Standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21G X 297 mm) * &quot; &quot; &quot; -------- (Please read Note 4 on the back before filling in this page). _ l · 11 l · Order! _! · ^ Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (), the front surface 5 2 of the rear mold body 50 and the slot 31 between the inner surface 3 2 of the cushion body 20 present a fluid communication relationship. The shape of each port 38, 39 can accommodate a needle inside, so the needle system and the slot 31 are in fluid communication with each other, and they do not need to be inserted into the hole 30. within. The injection needle is in fluid communication with one port (injection port 38), while the discharge needle is in fluid communication with another port (exhaust port 39). That is, one port 38 is used to add the monomer to the slot 31, and the other port 39 is used to place the monomer in the slot when placed next to the injected monomer. The air within the slot 31 is discharged. The discharge port 39 can also provide a fluid communication relationship between the outside of the pad body 20 and the slot hole 31, and the front can be moved axially and relative to each other. The air flow caused by the phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 is entered or discharged out of the volume, which is completely dependent on the mutual movement between the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 By. The best condition is that the needle penetrates the pad body 20 in a direction parallel to the meridional axis L of the pad body 20 and is inclined at a relatively inclined angle, and enters the individual ports 3, 8, 3 Within 9 This smaller angle and the way of paralleling the mating meridian axis L parallel to the pad body 20 reduce the possibility of the tip of the needle contacting any of the phantoms 40; 50. However, the more inclined angle can also be perpendicular to the meridional axis L, and the cushion body 20 can still work normally. The establishment of the ports 38, 39 is quite advantageous when the slot 31 is relatively small. The rear surface of the front phantom 40 is quite close to 28. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 male β) &lt; if read the precautions on the back before filling this page) I _ · I -------- r --------- ^ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401532 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (The rear phantom 5 0 The front surface 5 2 ° In this condition, insert the injection needle into the hole 30 or one can contact the two phantoms "50 0 simultaneously two surfaces 4 4, 5 2. This contact may hurt a phantom The surface of either the phantom is removed 'so that the lens will not have the correct size or it will leak out when the monomer is injected into the countersink. It is also well known that a hole is provided in the body 20 to exhaust the air located in the slot. It means' the slot 31 is directly connected to the outside air, instead of being connected to the outside air with the assistance of the port 39 and the injection needle. Another of the cushion body 20 of the present invention The feature is the material of the cushion body. In the specific embodiment presented, a feature required by the public is that the material of the cushion body is complete and compatible with the lens forming fluid, In this way, the polymerization of the fluid can be avoided. The material of the mat body should be made to avoid containing antioxidant groups such as "UV &quot; stabilizers and antioxidants. A" UV "stabilizer can be filtered into monomers because the monomer The reaction machine is almost the same as a solvent, so that the viscosity of the material made of the mat can be extracted and mixed with the monomer, and the edge of the lens can still be stored during storage. It can be kept moist. However, this wetness will still cause disturbance because it will potentially adhere the monomer to the carcass 20 and the phantoms 40 and 50, and this case is repeated use Need extra washing before And it will increase the operating cost. Therefore, what we need is an elastomer that is compatible with optical monomers and does not resist the polymerization of lens monomers during storage. As for the other side of the mat of the present invention (please first Read the notes on the back and fill out this page) ---- ^ ----- ί;?! --- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 面而言,其是相當的柔軟的,例如其係具有一種介在4 0 以及7 0之間的硬度測量計。再者,另一個所應關切的問 題則是本發明之墊體的製成材料是否具有長久的穩定性。 在現有的具體實施例中,一種適合的墊體製成材料是 —種含有KRATONR ,一種苯乙烯一乙烯一丙烯(丁烯 )的熱塑性塑膠,其是由德州、波士頓SHELL OilCompanyR所賣出者。這種熱塑性塑膠係包括了那些在 依利諾州之GLS公司在DYNAFLEXRG2703、2711以及 2712之商標名所賣出的塑膠。這些塑膠具有一種Shore A 的硬度,其強度係由4 3到6 2,而其重力則是爲〇 . 9 Gg/cc,而其張力係數則0、5 0的是3 0 0 %,其長度係 可由355到470,其張力強度至斷掉爲止的數値則是 6 8 0到1 0 0 Opsi,且其撕力強度則是1 1 3至1 2 7 。另種墊體的材質則是包括了一種P V C的配方。本發明 墊體的材料並一限於單一的一種材質。事實上,所需求之 墊體的材料係依據形成透鏡之特定單體複合物而有所不同 的。也就是說,某種墊體材質可能是需要某種特定透鏡形 成流體,而另種不同型式釣墊體材質則是需要另種的透鏡 材質。其他的材料係包括了具有彈性的P V C材質、矽、 k r a t ο η ^或是其中的混合物。 本發明同時亦包括了一種裝置,其係用以在該排出針 2 3 2或是該注入針由該墊體2 0處予以移開後,用以將 該墊體2 0予以密封。最好的情形是,該密封裝置係包括 了該墊體2 0係由Ρ V C、矽、KRAT0NRG、或是其中的 30 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公》) ί' 裝----l· (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) —^訂--------- A7 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 ___B7_ ------- 五、發明說明() 混合物所形成者。也就是說,該墊體的材料係可自我而形 成密封者,如此,其複合物則可在該針予以移除後防止拽 漏。 其他的密封裝置係包括了,例如是’在該針予以移開 後,其針孔實質上係予以封住的。另種的方法則是該密封 裝置係可包括了將該針予以留在該墊體內部,以防止流體 由該處流出,然而此種具體實施例因爲要處理露出在該墊 體外部的一段針所受到的限制,以及必須在塡充站不斷的 替換該針所受到的限制,所以並不建議使用。該密封裝置 的另一種具體實施例係在於保存洩漏至該針孔處的單體, 其係藉由快速的將該單體暴露於靠近該針孔的出口,並將 其暴露在U V光、熱、或是其他儲放源。除了在該針孔內 固化的單體所形成的密封裝置,將熱予以直接作用在該墊 體2 0本身亦可將該針孔予以密封起來。 請參看第4圖,其所顯示者係爲該模體另種的具體實 施例。該前方模體4 0係具有一個圓環形包圍著靠近於其 後方表面4 4之邊緣4 6的環6 0。該圓環形的環6 0係 增加了位在靠近於該後方模體5 0之前方表面5 2之槽孔 3 1的面積,因此,可形成和該埠3 8、3 9較佳的連通 ,或是在該針以垂直的方式插入於該經向軸L之內時,可 和該針的端部形成較佳的連通關係。在形成的透鏡內所產 生之脹起的情形在當儲存完畢時則可加以消除了。凡是熟 於此項技藝者均瞭解到該圓環形的環係可選擇性地或是附 加性的方式而加附在該後方模體5 0的前方表面5 2之上 31 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)X 297 mm) A7 B7 printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. In the aspect of the invention, it is quite soft, for example, it has a hardness between 40 and 70. Gauge. Furthermore, another concern is whether the material of the cushion body of the present invention has long-term stability. In the existing specific embodiment, a suitable cushion material is a thermoplastic containing KRATONR, a styrene-ethylene-propylene (butene) thermoplastic, which is sold by SHELL Oil CompanyR of Texas and Boston. Such thermoplastics include those sold under the trademarks DYNAFLEXRG2703, 2711, and 2712 by GLS, Illinois. These plastics have a Shore A hardness, whose strength ranges from 43 to 62, and its gravity is 0.9 Gg / cc, while its tension coefficient is 0, 50 is 3 0%, and its length The system can be from 355 to 470, its tensile strength to break is 680 to 100 Opsi, and its tear strength is 1 1 to 1 2 7. The material of the other cushion body includes a formula of P V C. The material of the cushion body of the present invention is not limited to a single material. In fact, the materials required for the pads will vary depending on the particular monomer composite that forms the lens. That is to say, a certain cushion material may require a specific lens to form a fluid, and another type of fishing cushion material may require another lens material. Other materials include flexible P V C material, silicon, k r a t ο η ^ or mixtures thereof. The present invention also includes a device for sealing the pad body 20 after the ejection needle 2 32 or the injection needle is removed from the pad body 20. In the best case, the sealing device includes the pad body 20, which is made of P VC, silicon, KRAT0NRG, or 30 of them. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297). ί 'Pack ---- l · (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) — ^ --------- A7 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ___B7_- ----- 5. Description of the invention () Formed by the mixture. That is, the material of the pad body can form a seal by itself, so that the compound can prevent the needle from being leaked after the needle is removed. Other sealing means include, for example, 'the pinhole is substantially sealed after the needle is removed. Another method is that the sealing device may include leaving the needle inside the pad body to prevent the fluid from flowing out there. However, this specific embodiment deals with a section of needle exposed outside the pad body. Due to the limitation and the limitation that the needle must be continuously replaced at the Yongchong Station, it is not recommended. Another specific embodiment of the sealing device is to store the monomer leaking to the pinhole, which is to quickly expose the monomer to the outlet near the pinhole and expose it to UV light, heat , Or other storage sources. In addition to the sealing device formed by the monomer solidified in the pinhole, heat can be directly applied to the pad body 20 itself, and the pinhole can be sealed. Please refer to FIG. 4, which shows another specific embodiment of the phantom. The front phantom 40 is a ring 60 that surrounds the edge 46 of the rear surface 44 near the rear surface 44. The circular ring 60 increases the area of the slot 3 1 located near the front surface 5 2 of the rear phantom 50, so that it can form a better communication with the ports 3 8, 39. Or when the needle is inserted into the meridional axis L in a vertical manner, a better communication relationship can be formed with the end of the needle. The bulging in the formed lens can be eliminated when storage is completed. Anyone skilled in this art knows that the circular ring system can be added to the rear phantom 5 0 on the front surface 5 2 of the ring body selectively or in addition. 31 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

------------t---- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) |&gt; κ_· 訂--------- A7 401522 __B7___ 五、發明說明() 的。 鏡片鑄造的方法以及裝置 總觀言之,透鏡形成總成1 0首先是在一個總成工作 站1 1 0而展開其程序,其後則是在一個塡充工作站2 0 0,其係在第5圖中所顯示者,且其整體係以1 〇 〇來爲 代表者。一個框架1 0 4係支撐著工作站1 1 〇、2 0 0 。在一個較佳的實施例中,該模體4 0、5 0係以旋轉的 方式而相互對齊,且係放置在該總成工作站1 1 〇之墊體 2 0內所界定的一個孔洞3 0之內者。在該塡充工作站2 0 0處’該模體4 0、5 0係以軸向的方向而移至該孔洞 3 0之內,以便彼此間能夠以預定的間隔距離(例如,適 當的距離以形成適當透鏡厚度)相間隔開。透鏡形成流體 係由該塡充工作站2 0 0處而注入至界定在兩個模體4 0 、5 0以及該孔洞3 0之間的槽孔3 1之內。本發明所使 用方法的討論主要係依據該過渡區墊體的具體實施例,且 此依據是相對於具有直立壁墊體的具體實施例者。 A·總成工作站 請參看第5圖至第8圖,該總成工作站1 1 0係包括 經 '% 著有—個裝置,其係用以支撐該墊體2 0,如此該模體4 1 0、5 0才可以插入於該孔洞3 〇之內。該總成工作站1 % 1 0最好是具有三個固定夾頭:一個前方模體固定夾頭1 ί 2 0、—後方模體/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0以及一個夾持固 | 定夾頭1 5 0。這些夾頭係設置在一個沿著軌道1 1 4而 t 滑動的平板1 1 2上。一個驅動缸1 1 6 ;諸如是一個氣 印 ^-----„----^訂---------始〆 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)------------ t ---- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) | &gt; κ_ · Order --------- A7 401522 __B7___ V. Invention description (). Lens casting method and device In general, the lens forming assembly 10 is first developed in an assembly station 1 1 0, and then it is in a charging station 2 0 0, which is the fifth The ones shown in the figure are represented by 100 as a whole. A frame 104 supports the workstations 110 and 2000. In a preferred embodiment, the phantoms 40 and 50 are aligned with each other in a rotating manner, and are placed in a hole 30 defined in the cushion body 20 of the assembly workstation 1 1 0. Within. At the filling station 200, the phantoms 40 and 50 are moved into the hole 30 in an axial direction so that they can be separated by a predetermined distance (for example, an appropriate distance to To form an appropriate lens thickness). The lens-forming fluid is injected from the filling station 200 into the slot 31 defined between the two phantoms 40, 50 and the hole 30. The discussion of the method used in the present invention is mainly based on the specific embodiment of the transition zone cushion body, and this basis is relative to the specific embodiment with the upright wall cushion body. A · Assembly Workstation Please refer to Figures 5 to 8. The assembly work station 1 1 0 includes a device that is supported by '%, which is used to support the cushion body 2 0, so the mold body 4 1 0, 50 can be inserted into the hole 3 0. The assembly workstation 1% 1 0 preferably has three fixing chucks: one front phantom fixing chuck 1 ί 2 0,-rear phantom / pad fixing chuck 1 3 0 and one clamping Chuck 1 5 0. These chucks are arranged on a flat plate 1 1 2 which slides along the track 1 1 4. A driving cylinder 1 1 6; such as a gas seal

401522 A7 ____ B7 五、發明說明() 動或是一個電動缸;沿著該軌道1 1 4,並在一個裝載位 置以及一個結合位置之間驅動著該滑動板1 1 2。在該裝 載位置處,如第6圖所示,該滑動板1 1 2係安置在一個 機罩1 0 2的外部表面處,而在如同第5圖所示之結合位 置處,該滑動板1 1 2係在該機罩1 0 2表面的內部。 該機罩1 0 2,其最好是由玻璃或是透明塑膠來製成 者,其功用係在作爲一種阻絕,覆蓋著該塡充工作站2 0 0以及一個機械臂1 6 0 (將由下述加以討論)來確保操 作者不受其他零件的干擾。該機罩1 0 2同時亦係作爲一 種安全裝置,其係在保護操作者不會受到該機械臂的接觸 〇 在較佳的具體實施例中,該前方模體4 0係儲存在一 個位在靠近該總成工作站11〇的儲存工作站(未顯示) 之內。該墊體2 0係儲存在另一個位置處,而其亦是位靠 近於該總成工作站1 1 0處,或是位在如同是該前方模體 4 0同樣的儲存位置。該墊體2 0最好是每個均具有一個 位在其個別孔洞3 0之內的後方模體5 0。如下所述者, 該後方模體5 0最好是在完成儲存程序以及在儲存的透鏡 由該兩個模體4 0、5 0中予以移開之後而放置在一個個 別墊體2 0的扎洞3 0之內。凡是熟於此項技藝者均知, 該墊體2 0以及該模體4 0、5 0係可以不同的組合方式 加以組合,例如,該模體4 0、5 0以及該墊體2 0均係 以個別的零件而加以儲存,該前方模體4 0設置在該墊體 2 0之內,而該後方模體5 0則係分別的加以儲存,抑或 33 本紙張尺度適用中國画家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) '* -VI裝-----r---:訂---------轉 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 401522 Α7 ---- Β7 五、發明說明() 是兩個模體4 0、5 0係同時設置以及儲存在該墊體2 0 的孔洞3 0之內。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 爲能開始在較佳實施例中的程序,操作者將欲形成透 鏡(例如,包括曲率的各項特徵)的參數輸入至諸如是鍵 盤的電腦次系統內(未顯示)。該電腦次系統包括了一個 記憶次系統以及一個可運算電腦程式的硬碟。用以將動力 輸至本發明各項零件,諸如是電腦次系統,的動力裝置( 未顯示)最好是一個具有1 2 0伏特交流電的動力源》 在電腦程式內的算法決定了形成所需透鏡之適當的前 方以及後方模體4 0、5 0,而電腦次系統爾後則提供了 一個輸出,以指示需要使用的正確模體。該前方模體4 0 通當是爲球形,而該後方模體5 0則是爲球形或是散射的 ,例如圓環形或是圓柱形。該前方模體4 0亦可形成具有 雙焦點或是參焦點以符合曲率的需求。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 在本發明的一個具體實施例中,該電腦次系統在其顯 示幕上顯示著使用何者適當模體的輸出資料。在另一個具 體實施例中則額外的在需使用之適當模體儲存位置的上方 的儲存工作站處閃爍著一個光點(未顯示)。所顯示的光 點協助操作者尋找適當的模體,以減少操作者使用一個不 適當的模體來_造透鏡的機會。 一個用以將透鏡形成結構10的零件予以運送到該總 成工作站110之滑板112的裝置係爲該名操作者實質 上的移動那些零件。本發明亦可使用自動操作系統(未顯 示),來將透鏡形成結構10的零件予以運送到該總成工 34 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格&lt;210 X 297公釐) A7 401522 _______B7___ 五、發明說明() 作站1 1 0之滑板1 1 2處。在自動系統內’電腦次系統 指示著一個電動臂(未顯示)來將適當的模體4 〇、5 0 以及墊體2 0運送到該總成工作站1 1 0的滑板1 1 2處 。而一旦該模體4 0、5 0以及該墊體2 0運送到該滑板 處,則該滑板1 1 2則會由裝載位置而沿著該軌道1 1 4 滑到位在該機罩1 〇 2表面內部的結合位置。 該總成工作站1 之前方模體固定夾頭1 2 0係具 有一個向上直立的圓形唇部1 2 2 ’其結構係可容置一個 前方模體4 0者。其他的前方模體支撐裝置係包括了一個 真空支撐(未顯示)彈簧夾(未顯示)以及其類似的物品 。該前方模體固定夾頭1 2 0可具有一個光點(未顯示) ,以指示一個前方模體係位在該夾頭上或是一個阻絕整個 程序繼續進行之閉鎖’直到一個前方模體係位在該夾頭1 2 0之上爲止。 一個球形前方模體4 〇的旋轉偏向,在當其放置在咳 前方模體固定夾頭1 2 0處時並不構成一個問題。然而’ 對於一個欲形成一個曲率透鏡的前方模體或是一個不對稱 的模體而言,偏向是相當重要的。在一個較佳的的具體實 施例中,該前方模體夾頭1 2 0係以數條平行的標誌線( 未顯示)來加以標示。操作者將形成扁平上端的上部的線 對齊,如此其才可以和標誌線對齊或是平行。因此,一個 具有曲率的前方模體係可以放置在兩個位置中的一個位置 處,而此兩個位置彼此間係以1 8 0°而相對者,而且兩 者係均平行於該標誌線者。對於累進曲率之前方模體而言 35 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱〉 (請先W讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝----Γ--l· 訂---- - ----綠 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 401522 五、發明說明() ,其中,沒有識別的標記存在該前方模體或是不對稱前方 模體中者,此時則可使用蝕刻或是刻劃的方式而加註一條 線以作爲對齊之用。一個電眼(未顯示)或是類似的物件 係可在整個程序進行之前來確認各個零件是否均位在其正 確位置上。對另一種方式而言,使用影像系統之自動化的 具體實施例係可將該前方模體予以正確的朝向該前方模體 固定夾頭1 2 0。 正確的將曲率予以對正的一個原因是如此一來,其扁 平上部在將透鏡形成的流體予以注入至該槽孔31之內以 防止空氣氣泡形成於其內部時係朝向垂直的方向。氣泡很 可能會停留在該槽孔3 1之內,若是,例如,該扁平的上 端在塡充時係水平的朝向。此外,重要的是,該前方模體 4 0應以相對於該散射後方模體5 0的方式而加以定位, 來確保在透鏡上形成正確的曲率。 該前方模體固定夾頭1 2 0最好是具有複數個空氣孔 1 2 4或是凹入的排出孔,其係可將離子化的空氣予以由 空氣源處導向該後方模體4 0的後方表面4 4。離子化的 空氣可確保灰塵以及其他不純的物質得以在該前模體4 0 放置在該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之前而予以移除’而此項動 作的發生則會在以下的討論中加以詳述。 該後方模體/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0係具有一個墊體支 撐唇1 3 2,其係製成可在其上支撐該墊體2 0的第二端 點2 4者,而此第二端點則是該墊體最靠近於放置在該孔 洞3 0內之後方模體的端點。而對該前方模體4 〇而言’ 36 ------------裝---------^訂!--------μ. (請先閱績背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 操作者,或者是爲一個自動操作系統’將該墊體2 0以及 其內部的後方模體5 0放在該夾頭1 3 0之上。其他用以 支撐該墊體2 0以及該後方模體5 0的裝置係包括了對每 一個零件的個別夾頭、真空夾頭、夾子或是其類似的物品 〇 如上所述,該後方模體5 0最好是在將該後方模體5 0放置在其儲存位置之前而放在該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之 內。將該後方模體5 0在該墊體2 0之內的孔洞3 0中具 有一個預定的朝向是相當重要的。該前方模體4 0以及後 方模體5 0並不需要彼此間具有正確相對稱的朝向,但其 •則需要位在預定的位置,而由此一位置處,一個模體爾後 則可藉由旋轉而和另一個模體相吻合。 當把該墊體2 0放置在該總成工作站1 1 0時,其旋 轉位置是相當重要的,因爲如此一來,該後方模體5 0才 可在該後方模體5 0/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0上具有一個已 知的旋轉方向》同時,該墊體2 0的位置亦是相當重要的 ,因爲其可具有形成於其內部的埠3 8、3 9,而在其內 部,注入的針以及排出針則是由此處而插入者。依此,如 第2圖以及第3圖所示者,墊體2 0之較佳的具體實施例 .係具有一個靠近於其第二端點2 4的鎖孔2 8,或是其他 可確保係在該支撐唇部1 3 2上具有正確方向的裝置。在 一個具體實施例中,若是該墊體2 0的鎖孔2 8並未能正 確的予以吻合’則一個鎖定裝置(未顯示)會阻止透鏡形 成的程序繼續進行。例如,該滑板1 1 2會直到該鎖定裝 37 本紙張尺度通用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公® ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)401522 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention () An electric cylinder or an electric cylinder; the slide plate 1 1 2 is driven along the track 1 1 4 and between a loading position and a coupling position. At the loading position, as shown in FIG. 6, the sliding plate 1 1 2 is placed on the outer surface of a hood 102, and at the joining position as shown in FIG. 5, the sliding plate 1 12 is inside the hood 102 surface. The hood 102 is preferably made of glass or transparent plastic. Its function is to act as a barrier, covering the charging station 2 0 0 and a mechanical arm 1 6 0 (to be described below) (Discussed) to ensure that the operator is not disturbed by other parts. The hood 102 is also used as a safety device to protect the operator from contact with the robot arm. In a preferred embodiment, the front phantom 40 is stored in a position Within the storage station (not shown) near the assembly station 110. The cushion body 20 is stored in another position, and it is also located near the assembly workstation 110, or in the same storage position as the front phantom 40. The pads 20 are each preferably provided with a rear die 50 located within its individual hole 30. As described below, the rear phantom 50 is preferably placed on a separate pad 20 after the storage procedure is completed and the stored lens is removed from the two phantoms 40 and 50. Within 30 holes. Anyone familiar with this art knows that the mat body 20 and the phantoms 40 and 50 can be combined in different combinations. For example, the phantom body 40, 50 and the pouch body 2 are both Stored as individual parts, the front phantom 40 is located within the cushion body 20, and the rear phantom 50 is stored separately, or 33 paper standards are applicable to Chinese painter standards (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) '* -VI equipment ----- r ---: order --------- turn economy Printed by Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau 401522 Α7 ---- Β7 V. Description of the invention () The two phantoms 40 and 50 are set and stored in the hole 3 of the mat 2 at the same time. . (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page.) In order to start the procedure in the preferred embodiment, the operator enters the parameters of the lens (for example, various features including curvature) into a computer such as a keyboard Within the system (not shown). The computer subsystem includes a memory subsystem and a hard disk capable of computing computer programs. The power device (not shown) used to transmit power to various parts of the present invention, such as a computer secondary system, is preferably a power source with 120 volt AC power. The algorithm in the computer program determines the required formation The appropriate front and rear phantoms of the lens are 40, 50, and the computerized sub-system then provides an output to indicate the correct phantom to be used. The front phantom 40 is generally spherical, while the rear phantom 50 is spherical or scattering, such as a circular ring or a cylinder. The front phantom 40 can also be formed with a double focus or a reference focus to meet the requirements of curvature. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. In a specific embodiment of the present invention, the computerized sub-system displays on its display screen the output data of the appropriate motif. In another specific embodiment, a light dot (not shown) is additionally flashed at the storage workstation above the appropriate phantom storage location to be used. The displayed light spot assists the operator in finding the appropriate phantom to reduce the opportunity for the operator to use an inappropriate phantom to build the lens. A device for transporting parts of the lens forming structure 10 to the slide plate 112 of the assembly station 110 is for the operator to substantially move those parts. The present invention can also use an automatic operating system (not shown) to transport the parts of the lens forming structure 10 to the assembly 34. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications &lt; 210 X 297 mm) A7 401522 _______B7___ V. Description of the invention () Slide 1 1 2 at station 1 1 0. Within the automatic system, a computerized system instructs an electric arm (not shown) to transport the appropriate phantoms 40, 50, and pads 20 to the slide 1 12 of the assembly workstation 1 10. Once the phantoms 40, 50 and the mat 20 are transported to the slide, the slide 1 12 will slide from the loading position along the track 1 1 4 to the hood 1 〇2. The bonding position inside the surface. The assembly work station 1 has a front phantom fixing chuck 1 2 0 with a circular lip 12 2 ′ standing upright, and its structure can accommodate a front phantom 40. Other front phantom support devices include a vacuum support (not shown) spring clip (not shown) and similar items. The front phantom fixing chuck 1 2 0 may have a light spot (not shown) to indicate that a front mold system is located on the chuck or a lock that prevents the entire process from proceeding until a front mold system is located at the The chuck is above 1 2 0. The rotation bias of a spherical front phantom 40 does not pose a problem when it is placed at the front phantom fixing chuck 120. However, for a forward phantom or an asymmetric phantom that wants to form a curvature lens, the bias is quite important. In a preferred embodiment, the front phantom chuck 120 is marked with several parallel marking lines (not shown). The operator aligns the upper line forming the flat upper end so that it can be aligned or parallel to the marking line. Therefore, a front mold system with curvature can be placed at one of two positions, and the two positions are opposite to each other at 180 °, and both are parallel to the marking line. For the square phantom before progressive curvature, this paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Loading ---- Γ- -l · Order --------- Printed A7 B7 401522 by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Green Economy 5. Description of the invention (), in which no identification mark exists on the front phantom or is asymmetric For the front phantom, you can use etching or scribing to add a line for alignment. An electric eye (not shown) or a similar object can be confirmed before the entire process. Are the parts evenly positioned in their correct position. For another way, the specific embodiment of the automation using the imaging system can correctly point the front phantom toward the front phantom fixing chuck 1 2 0. Correct One reason for correcting the curvature is that its flat upper part injects fluid formed by the lens into the slot 31 to prevent air bubbles from forming in the vertical direction when it is formed inside. stop Within the slot 31, if, for example, the flat upper end is oriented horizontally at the time of filling. In addition, it is important that the front phantom 40 should be opposite to the scattering rear phantom 50. It is positioned in a manner to ensure the correct curvature is formed on the lens. The front phantom fixing chuck 1 2 0 preferably has a plurality of air holes 1 2 4 or a concave discharge hole, which can ionize The air is guided from the air source to the rear surface 44 of the rear mold body 40. The ionized air can ensure that dust and other impure substances can be placed in the front mold body 40 in the hole 3 of the cushion body 20 Removed before 0 'and the occurrence of this action will be described in detail in the following discussion. The rear phantom / pad fixing chuck 1 3 0 has a pad support lip 1 3 2 which is A second end point 24 is formed to support the pad body 20 thereon, and this second end point is the end point of the pad body closest to the square phantom placed inside the hole 30. For the front phantom 4 〇 '36 ------------ install --------- ^ order! -------- μ. (Please first Back of record Please fill in this page for the matters needing attention) Printed by the Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () Operator, or It is for an automatic operation system 'to place the cushion body 20 and the internal rear mold body 50 on the chuck 1 3 0. Others are used to support the cushion body 2 0 and the rear mold body 50. The device system includes individual chucks, vacuum chucks, clamps or the like for each part. As mentioned above, the rear mold body 50 is preferably placed in the rear mold body 50 for storage. It is placed in the hole 30 of the cushion body 20 before the position. It is important to have the rear mold body 50 in a predetermined orientation in the hole 30 in the pad body 20. The front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 do not need to have correct and symmetrical orientations with each other, but they need to be located at a predetermined position, and from this position, a phantom can be later Rotate to fit another phantom. When the mat body 20 is placed on the assembly workstation 110, its rotation position is very important, because then, the rear mold body 50 can be fixed on the rear mold body 50 / mat body. The chuck 1 30 has a known rotation direction. At the same time, the position of the pad body 20 is also very important, because it can have ports 3 8 and 39 formed inside it, and inside it, The injection needle and the ejection needle are inserted here. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the preferred embodiment of the cushion body 20 has a lock hole 28 near the second end point 24, or other means to ensure A device with the correct orientation attached to the support lip 1 3 2. In a specific embodiment, if the lock holes 28 of the pad body 20 do not fit properly ', a locking device (not shown) will prevent the process of lens formation from proceeding. For example, the skateboard 1 1 2 will be installed until the lock is installed. 37 paper sizes are in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × 297 male®) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

.i 裝----^----^訂·!--------M 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 置的功能係在藉由將該墊體2 0正確的在該後方模體/墊 體固定夾頭1 3 0上正確的吻合後,才會由該裝載位置移 至結合位置。鎖定裝置亦可提供視覺上的指示,其則諸如 是在總成工作站的一個警告燈或是在電腦次系統之螢幕上 顯示一個訊息。 該總成工作站110亦包括了有一個用以將該前方模 體4 0予以插入於該墊體2 0內孔洞3 0的裝置,該裝置 則最好是爲一個可移動的機械臂。其他具有相同功能之前 方模體4 0插入的裝置(未顯示)係包括了操作者以手動 的方式將其移動並插入於該前方模體,並使用滑板、氣動 工具、線性馬達、龍門吊架臂以及類似的裝置。 在較佳實施例中使用的移動臂將放置在該前方模體固 定夾頭1 2 0上的前方模體予以昇起,並將其經由本身的 第一端點2 2而軸向地推向該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內, 直到該前方模體4 0的後方表面5 4和過渡區3 4的插入 階梯物3 6。如上對該墊體所述者,該過渡區3 4係在於 將該前方模體4 0予以固定在一個固定且係爲已知的位置 ,並且實質上在該前方模體4 0以及該階梯物3 6之間形 成一種防漏的密封。而一旦該前方模體4 0係在該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內適當地予以定位後,該移動臂則會由插 入的模式中予以釋放,並且移至一個遠離的位置處,或是 維持著和該前方模體4 0接觸以將該墊體2 0予以支持在 該後方模體/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0之上。 在較佳的具體實施例中,該移動臂係爲如第5圖以及 38 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) (諳先閱讀背面之注旁李項再填寫本頁) 裝---------L 訂-竣 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 一 B7 五、發明說明() 第1 0圖所示之一種具有一種氣動抓1 6 2的機械臂1 6 _0_,該氣動抓1 6 2係以可分離的方式而和該前方模體4 0的前方表面4 2而相互接觸者。有關於機械臂1 6 0的 一個例子則是可見到一種爲Mitsubishi(r)Electric之商標名 爲“ Movemaster RV-M2”的產品。電腦次系統導引著以 及指揮著該機械臂1 6 0的所有運作。該機械臂1 6 0亦 可包括著有一種內部電腦,其係界面著該電腦次系統以可 對該機械臂160加以控制。 請參看第1 0圖所示,該機械臂1 6 0的本體係放置 在該機罩1 0 2表面的內部。一個肩部1 6 4係和該機械 臂1 6 0本體的上臂相接觸以,其係藉由一個肘部1 6 6 而和一個前臂1 6 7而相接觸者。該氣動抓1 6 2係和該 機械臂1 6 0的前臂1 6 7在一個跑部1 6 8而相接觸。 該機械臂1 6 0因爲其可在底部的樞接點作水平的旋轉, 以及藉由移動其肩部1 6 4、肘部1 6 6以及該機械臂的 腕_部1 6 8之垂直昇降,所以其具有全向的運動範圍。一 個位在以及連接至氣動抓1 6 2和腹部1 6 8之間的腕_部 工具片1 6 9係可爲了該氣動抓1 6 2而览作全向的旋轉 運動。該機械臂1 6 0提供了五度的自由度,其並不包括 手以及大量的&amp;置記憶,並且係由D C伺服馬達(未顯示 )來加以驅動,並且在其內部含括了全套的氣動管線(未 顯示)。 在本發明的一個具體實施例中,該機械臂1 6 0可使 得該前方模體4 0在被移入該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0時得以 39 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) &lt;請先閱讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) 裝·! Γ — ll· 訂·'-! 竣 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 A7 B7 401522 五、發明說明() 朝向一個預定的方向,而不論其最初於放置在該前方模體 固定夾頭1 2 0時的方向爲何。也就是說,該機械臂1 β 0會依需要而將該前方模體4 0在孔洞3 〇內予以扭曲至 一個對應於該墊體2 0預定的方向。該前方模體4 〇必須 要借助於一種藉由該機械臂1 6 0而可分離的裝置來加以 標記,如此,該機械臂1 6 0才可以有一個參考點。 該總成工作站110最好是具有一種將該後方模體5 0予以插入於該墊體2 0孔洞3 0內的裝置。是爲該後方 模體/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0—部份之該後方模體插入裝置 最好是另外具有一種可將該後方模體5 0予以由該墊體2 0之孔洞3 0中予以移出的裝置。如此一來,一個後方模 體插入裝置既可將該後方模體5 0予以由該孔洞3 〇中移 出,亦可其予以移入於該孔洞3 〇之內。 該後方模體插入裝置最好是具有一個可移動的活塞i 3 4,其係設計成以可分離的方式而和該後方模體5 〇的 一部份相接觸,例如是其後方表面5 4,並且可將該後方 模體5 0予以由該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內移出或是將該 後方模體5 0予以移入該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內。更詳 細的說,該後方模體插入裝置係包括了一個模體支撐片i 3 6,其係以苛分離的方式而和該後方模體5 0的後方表 面5 4相接觸,以及一種和該模體支撐片1 3 6相接觸, 並用於將該模體支撐片1 3 6移動的裝置。該後方模體5 0的可移動的模體支撐片1 3 6係被該後方模體/墊體固 定夾頭1 3 0的支撐唇部1 3 2所覆蓋著。 40 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) .Μ----^----^ ---------β (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 A7 _____B7___ 五、發明說明() 該模體支撐片1 3 6係可在如第7圖所示的插入位置 以及一個後退位置之間移動者,而在該插入位置處,該模 體支撐片1 3 6係和該支撐唇部1 3 2具有相同的高度者 。在如第8圖所示的後退位置處’該模體支撐片會移動或 是後退至一個支撐框架1 3 8,而此框架1 3 8係具有複 數個直立、且在該支撐唇部1 3 2以及一個圓柱形固定片 1 4 0之間延伸的支撐柱1 3 9。該模體支撐片1 3 6當 處在完全後退的位置時係鄰近於該圓柱形固定片1 4 0 ° 可在該氣壓缸1 4 2之內移動之“T”形活塞1 3 4的一 部份係固接於該模體支撐片1 3 6。雖然可用其他的驅動 裝置(諸如是電動線圈),該“T&quot;形活塞1 3 4最好是 以氣動來加以控制,並且係對一種經由一個適當的空氣埠 的氣壓缸1 4 2所供應的氣壓作反應的動作。也就是說’ 該活塞1 3 4係可對應於一種由一個第一埠1 4 4所供應 的壓縮空氣而在氣缸1 4 2內作向上的運動,並且對應於 一種由一個第二埠1 4 6所供應的壓縮空氣而作向下的運 動。該模體支撐片1 3 6會對應地移動附著的活塞1 3 4 〇 當該後方模體5 0以及該墊體2 0放置在該後方模體 /墊體固定夾韻1 3 0上時,該後方模體5 0係靠近於模 體支撐片1 3 6的。複數個連接於真空源(未顯示)的真 空埠1 4 8則是裝置在該模體支撐片1 3 6的內部。當該 模體支撐片1 3 6係位在該插入位置時,該真空埠1 4 8 係和該後方模體5 0的後方表面5 4相連通,且係藉由啓 41 本紙張尺度適用中困國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公麓)~一 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝---^----^訂---------線 401522 A7 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作杜印製 B7 五、發明說明() 動該真空源而製造出一種作用在該後方表面5 4上的吸力 。此吸力係足以將該後方模體5 0在當該模體支撐片1 3 6係移向該後退位置時,由該孔洞3 0的內部予以拉出並 和該孔洞3 0分離。也就是說,該後方模體5 0係藉由啓 動一個真空源而被拉離開該孔洞3 0,並且可將該模體支 撐片1 3 6予以移向後退位置處。在具體實施例中,該後 方模體5 0由該墊體2 0處後退時,機乎是該機械臂1 6 0將該前方模體4 0由該前方模體固定夾頭1 2 0處予以 移動,並將其經由該墊體2 0的第一端點2 2而插入的同 時。 本發明同時亦包括了一種用以將該墊體支撐裝置相對 於該墊體2 0的經向軸L作旋轉的裝置。一種散射模體表 面在不同的軸上具有不同的半徑。凡是熟於此項技藝者倌 瞭解,該後方模體5 0相對於該前方模體4 0的方向性是 相當重要的,尤其是對於一種設計成欲製造具有多重焦點 之曲率的透鏡的前方模體而言》因此,調整後方模體5 0 相對於該前方模體4 0相對的旋轉位置是需要的,而此狀 況則是在該後方模體係處在後退位置且使用一種旋轉裝置 時而可能發生。 旋轉裝置&amp;圍著導引著支撐唇部1 3 2中的一個或是 該模體支撐片1 3 6的電腦次系統,以可在需要時可分別 地對該隻體2 0或是該後方模體5 0加以旋轉或是扭曲至 所預定的角度。壓縮空氣爾後則會將該活塞1 3 4以及該 模體支撐片1 3 6推送到插入位置,如此,該後方模體5 42 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱 ί1'裝---------^訂·!.-------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) A7 _______B7__ 五、發明說明() 0則會在其所旋轉的方向下再度地被插入該墊體2 0的孔 洞3 0之內。所以,該後方模體5 0當再度的被插入於該 墊體2 0的孔洞3 0內時,其所在的位置將會是一個相對 於該前方模體4 0的預定的旋轉方向上’而此則可對散射 的後方模體5 0提供相對於前方模體4 0適當的方向性。 目前最好則是旋轉支撐唇部1 3 2 ’並連接該墊體2 0以 及該前方模體4 0,而不是對握持著有該後方模體5 0的 模體支撐片136加以旋轉。 本發明最好是尙具有一種用以決定一個選定後方模體 尺寸的裝置,更詳細地說就是該後方模體5 0的高度。本 明的具體實施例係在上述事項下來加以運作者,其中,該 前方模體的尺寸係在一個特定容差的範圍之內者,而該尺 寸則因爲用於形成前方模體的硏磨技術相當的進步,故而 一般而言係相當的精確的。然而,那些前述的事項對於後 方模體而言就不是那的精確了,尤其地是在當該後方模體 係水平置放時,對於其中央的厚度或是高度而言是相當的 不精確的。也就是說,由後方模體5 0的後方表面5 4到 後方模體5 0前方表面5 2頂部用以形成同樣型態透鏡的 厚度可在不同的後方模體之間而容許有稍許的不同。後方 模體間的容差你在形成透鏡中最大的變數,並且,事實上 其甚至可大到0 · 0 5,而此則是在形成正確透鏡時所能 容許之最小的容差。而也因爲如此,所以本發明使用了一 種決定裝置。 爲了能決定後方模體5 0的高度,在某些具體實施例 43 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) .裝----^----^訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消t合作杜印製 本紐尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) &quot; 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 內的決定裝置係包括了一個在當其處在後退位置時,以光 學的方式而容置至少是後方模體5 0形狀之一部份影像的 裝置,一個用以將該後方模體5 0之諸如是其高度或是厚 度等的資料予以數據化的裝置。產生裝置產生了一個和電 腦次系統相連通的信號,並且儲存在其記憶次系統之內。 一個超」機14 9 (較佳的光學容置裝置)在當該後方 模體5 0移至後退位置時,係處在一個可觀看該後方模體 5 0的位置上。C CD或者是相類似的祖機1 4 9會將後 方模體5 0的影像予以記錄下來,爾後則係由數據化裝置 以及產生裝置則用以決定後方模體5 0的高度。祖機1 4 9亦可使用增益控制(一種自動光圈)或是相類似的物件 來確保後方模體的影像接收情形是相當良好的。 數據裝置係可以爲一種鏡頭抓取器(未顯示),而其 也是人所週知的一種捕捉板。其他數據裝置的具體實施例 是爲一種數據祖機,藉此來替換類比祖機以及鏡頭抓取器 ,一個可掃描的線性感應器以及類似的物件。產生裝置以 及數據裝置亦可加以整合以成爲一種元件。 在本發明中的另一個具體實施例中,該模體4 0、5 0係可加以預先測量並以一標記加以註記,以代表該次的 測量。操作者司·檢視該標記,而該標記則會在將該後方模 體5 0放置在後方模體/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0上之前,傳 送一個和該後方模體5 0同樣大小的訊號到電腦次系統。 該標記係可由墨水而標記在一個模體的表面上(例如是該 後方模體5 0的前方表面5 2),如此,則該標記則會印 44 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) (請先《讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) i 裝----^----^訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 ____ B7 五、發明說明() 記在儲放的透鏡上,而由此則可用以追縱該透鏡。而此標 記在用以製成另一個透鏡之前會由該模體表面上加以替換 掉。印記在透鏡上的標記則會位在於製成透鏡時予以切開 的位置上。同樣地,該後方模體5 0本身的後方表面5 4 係可以蝕刻的方式而製’作一個對應於準備印記在前方表面 52上之標記的指示。 由於在本具體實施例中,電腦次系統並不知道在複數 個後方模體5 0之中要使用那一個來製成所需要的透鏡曲 率,所以電腦次系統則會被要求要能儲存以及使用大量的 檢視表,並配合著每一個特定的模體特性來共同的使用。 如果系統使用了例如是一千個模體,則使用一個監視器1 4 9來監看每一個後方模體5 0或是由該標記來獲得所需 要的資料將是非常方便的。因此,對於每一個後方模體5 0而言,其高度是已加以確定了,而此確定的高度爾後則 會加以運算來求得介於模體4 0、5 0之間所需要的軸向 分離距離,並藉此來獲得所需要透鏡之正確的厚度。也就 是說,該後方模體5 0確定的高度係用以界定模體4 0、 5 0在該墊體2 0之孔洞3 0之內軸向移動的距離。 持續組合的程序時,該後方模體5 0係再插入以便鄰 近於該墊體2'0的後方端點2 4,而此也正好相對於其所 計算之軸向分離距離。離開由該兩個模體4 0、5 0以及 孔洞3 0所形成的槽孔3 1是沒有必要的,因爲該後方模 體5 0僅插入於該孔洞3 0之內一小段的距離而已。如下 所述者,該塡充工作站2 0 0最好是包括了一種用以在該 45 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先Μ讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) 裝 -------l· 訂·'--------繞 A7 B7 401522 五、發明說明() 孔洞3 0之內將該後方模體5 〇移至和該前方模體4 0之 間的軸向分離距離的裝置°因此’介於該後方模體5 〇以 及該前方模體40之間的軸向分離距離在結合工作站11 0處並不是很重要的。 在本發明的另一個具體實施例內,其係以互補的方式 而將該後方模體5 0予以插入於該孔洞3 0之內’並利用 後方模體插入裝置而移至和該方模體4 0之間距離一段所 需要的軸向分離距離。雖然並不是需要的,但是利用一根 針或是其他裝置在本發明的另一個具體實施例調整內時, 來排除該槽孔3 1仍然是必要的,如此才可確保在當彼此 移向對方時該兩個模體4 0、5 0仍然是可相對於該孔洞 3 0的內部表面3 2而準確的吻合在一起。 總成工作站110最後的夾頭是爲夾持固定夾頭15 0。一種用以在該孔洞3 0之內將該模體4 0、5 0予以 固定的裝置是儲存在該夾持固定夾頭1 5 0之上者。該夾 持固定夾頭1 5 0具有一個圓形的凹槽,而其形狀則係可 容置該墊體2 0者。用於透鏡形成總成1 〇的穩固裝置係 可選擇性地而在此處予以加入其間的。該穩固裝置係可在 該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內穩穩地以相對於彼此的方式而 固定每一個模II。因此一來,在該模體4 〇、5 0係在該 塡充工作站2 0 0處以軸向的移動而間隔一段需求的距離 後’該穩固裝置穩固地夾持住兩個模體4 〇、5 〇,如此 其間的相對位置才不會改變。依此,在本發明的具體實施 例內之該穩固裝置係放置在該夾持固定夾頭1 5 〇處的墊 ______ 46 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)^i721() x 297公爱) 裝----'----^訂.|--------轉 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 體2 0之外部表面2 6周圍’並係在該塡充工作站2 0 0 處予以穩固地固定住。 請參看第9圖,該穗固裝置的較佳具體實施例係爲一 種軸向的夾子1 5 2,其係可藉由圍繞以及緊固該墊體2 0的外部表面2 6而維持著該模體4 0、5 0的位置者。 該夾子1 5 2係具有一個帶狀部份1 5 6以及一個用以鎖 定該帶狀部份的曲軸鎖1 5 8。鎖定的帶狀部份壓迫該墊 體2 0之本體向內以確保兩個模體4 0、5 0彼此間不會 改變彼此的位置,以及加強該墊體2 0和該模體4 0、5 0間所形成的密封。然而,該墊體2 0和兩個模體4 0、 5 0間的摩擦力,在當單體於儲存而收縮時,並無法由一 個模體朝向另一個模體時而排除一個模體(例如是在階梯 狀墊體之具體實施例內的後方模體50)。該軸向夾子1 5 2的另一個優點是爲其亦可提供一種在當處理透鏡形成 總成1 0時,其可提供機械臂1 6 0或是操作員所使用的 把手構件1 5 4,而其則諸如是爲一曲軸或是其他的突出 物。 當在該總成工作站1 1 0對齊所有元件時,該機械臂 1 6 0將該墊體2 0以及兩個模體4 0、5 0在該孔洞3 0之內由該後方模體/墊體固定夾頭1 3 0處移至夾持固 定夾頭1 5 0處。該機械臂1 6 0同時在需要時係在該夾 持固定夾頭1 5 0處於將該透鏡形成總成1 0插入於該軸 向夾子1 5 2之前扭曲該墊體2 0 »如果,該墊體2 0在 當該後方模體5 0係處在收縮的位置上時加以扭曲,則該 47 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS&gt;A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先W讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -1 SM.----*-----------線 A7 B7 401522 五、發明說明() 機械臂1 6 0在當移動該墊體2 0至該夾持固定夾頭1 5 0時會對該墊體2 0作旋轉,如此該墊體2 0才會處在預 先所需要的方向上。因爲旋轉的發生,所以該墊體2 0的 埠3 8、3 9係處在正確的位置,以可在該塡充工作站2 0 0處插入於該注入針2 5 2以及該排出針2 3 2,並且 扁平頂部在當位在該塡充工作站2 0 0以防止氣泡的發生 時係實質地朝向上的。如果扁平頂部並沒有正確地予以定 向,則其因爲存在於其邊緣表面張力的高能區,故而將會 在其邊緣上有捕捉氣泡的趨勢。 同時,該軸向夾子1 5 2可包括有複數個穿越其中的 開口(未顯示),其中的一個開口係和該墊體2 0的埠3 8、3 9中的一個而吻合。該注入針2 5 2係插入於一個 開口,而該排出針2 3 2則係穿插於另一個開口,如此兩 個針2 3 2、2 5 2則可和該墊體2 0之個別的埠3 8、 3 9而相互連通。 本發明的另一個具體實施例並不使用一個穩固裝置。 該墊體應該更厚一些,並且該模體應該更密切地容置在該 墊體之內,以確保沒有洩漏的發生。此一具體實施例因爲 所使用的自動化程序,故而並沒有迫切的需求。 塡充工作站 在組合工作站1 1 〇組合了墊體2 0、模體4 0、5 0以及該軸向夾子1 5 2之後,該機械臂1 6 0將形成好 了的透鏡總成傳送到塡充工作站2 0 0,此則如第1 1圖 所示。在總成工作站運作之該機械臂160係由假想線來 48 &amp;張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) /i Μ----一---l· -------^ (請先《讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 401522 Α7 ______ Β7 五、發明說明() 加以表示。同時,移至另一個工作站2 0 0的機械臂亦是 由假想線來加以表示。 現在請參看第1 2圖至1 4圖,該塡充工作站2 0 0 最好是具有一個用以支撐該透鏡形成結構1 〇的裝置,以 及一個用以相對於該前方模體4 0而軸向移動該後方模體 5 0至介於前方模體4 0以及後方模體5 0之間複數個軸 向分離距離中的一個預定的距離的裝置(例如是該後方模 體50係被移至該階梯式墊體的內部)。若是使用該直立 壁的墊體而不是階梯式的墊體的話,前方模體4 0亦可選 擇性地移動。 塡充工作站2 0 0具有一個直立的支撐板2 1 0,其 係在於支撐一個頂架2 1 2以及一個底架2 1 4。該頂架 2 1 2則係在於支撐排出總成2 3 0,並且該底架2 1 4 則係在於支撐該塡充總成2 5 0。 該軸向移動的裝置最好是具有一個圓柱形的活塞2 2 0 ’而其一個端點則係可和該模體相接觸,藉此而可在該 孔洞3 0之內滑動。一個用以產生一種輸出的線性啓動器 2 2 2或是伺服馬達係放置在框架的底部,且係包括了有 一個球形的螺釘(未顯示),而在該螺釘上則有一個滑動 塊(未顯示)¾跨其上。一種用以將該線性啓動器2 2 2 機械性的和該活塞2 2 0相耦合在一起的裝置,或者是更 詳細的說是爲一個耦合器2 2 4將該線性啓動器2 2 2的 輸出轉換成該活塞2 2 0的移動。該活塞2 2 0將放置在 該墊體2 〇內孔洞3 0的後方模體5 0以相對於該前方模 49 本紙張尺度過用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格⑵G χ 297公爱) (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 illr !ι·訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 ----:-----B7_ 五、發明說明() 體4 0的方式而加以軸向的移動。第1 3圖顯示著該後方 模體5 〇在被沿著該墊體2 〇之孔洞3 0推進前的狀態圖 ’而第1 4圖則顯示著該圓柱形活塞2 2 0在將該後方模 體5 0推動至該前方模體4 〇後的狀態圖,如此,介於該 後方模體5 0以及該前方摸體4 0之間的距離以及該槽孔 3 1則係處在所需要的尺寸了。電動或者是氣動動力係被 加以使用以操作該線性啓動器2 2 2。 在一個具體實施例中,該活塞2 2 0更將該後方模體 5 0推入該孔洞3 0內而朝向於該前方模體4 0,其則是 相對於拉動該後方模體5 0 ~般。也就是說,當在該結合 工作站1 1 0加以結合時,介於該後方模體5 0以及該方 模體4 0之間的分離距離是如此的,以致於爲了形成透鏡 ,活塞2 2 0僅在該後方模體5 0上行使推動的作用力。 然而,一個連接於一個真空源的真空管線(未顯示)係可 穿越過該活塞2 2 0,如此一來一個真空或是真空吸力則 可作用在該後方模體5 0的後方表面5 4上,以推動或是 拉動該後方模體5 0。同時,該真空管線亦可確保當該活 塞2 2 0推動該後方模體5 0時,該活塞2 2 0係緊密地 和該後方模體5 0緊緊地結合在一起,如此該後方模體5 0才不會傾倒,因爲若是該後方模體5 0傾倒的話,則會 造成透鏡不當的形成,或者是造成所注入的單體會經由該 後方模體5 0而洩漏出來。 該塡充工作站2 0 0亦可包括了有用以在該前方以及 後方模體4 0、5 0之中間以及該孔洞3 0之間,或者是 50 I:裝----^----^訂·1--------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 401522 ___B7___ 五、發明說明() 在該槽孔3 1以及該墊體2 0外部表面2 6的外部之間提 供液體相連通的裝置。此外,該塡充工作站2 0 0亦包括 了一種用以將一種形成透鏡的流體予以注射至該槽孔31 內部的裝置。前述之提供裝置係爲一種排出裝置2 3 0, 並且該注入的裝置係爲塡充總成2 5 0。該排出裝置2 3 0以及塡充總成2 5 0在結構上以及操作上均爲相似的。 該排出工作站2 3 0包括了一種排出針2 3 2,其係 具有一個底端2 3 4以及一個尖端2 3 6,且該排出針2 3 2係穿越過該墊體2 0的一部份者。該排出針2 3 2之 尖端2 3 6係和該底端2 3 4之間產生流體相連通者,藉 此而可讓一種諸如是空氣之流體得以在其間流通。 該排出工作站2 3 0係包括了一種用以將該排出針2 3 2在一個第一位置以及一個第二位置之間移動的裝置。 在如同第1 4圖所示的第一個位置內,該排出針2 3 2的 尖端2 3 6係和該槽孔3 1而形成流體相連通者,並且在 第1 3圖所示的第二位置處,該尖端2 3 6係和該墊體2 0以及其孔洞3 0係分離開一段距離者。該移動裝置最好 是爲一種驅動著一種啷筒活塞2 4 4的氣動缸2 4 0,其 係和一個耦合塊2 4 6而接觸在一起者。—種啷筒支撐塊 2 4 2支撐著緣排出針2 3 2並且係穩固地附於該耦合塊 2 4 2者。因此,該唧筒支撐塊2 4 2以及該排出針2 3 2會因著該啷筒活塞2 4 4之故而移動。—種保護性的覆 蓋(未顯示)在當該排出針2 3 2係處在第二位置時,可 選擇性地覆蓋在該排出針2 3 2的尖端。 51 @張尺度適用&gt; 國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁).i equipment ---- ^ ---- ^ Order ·! -------- M Printed by A7 B7, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description () The function is set by After the mat body 20 is correctly fitted on the rear mold body / mat body fixing clamp 130, the mat body 20 is moved from the loading position to the coupling position. The locking device can also provide visual indications such as a warning light on the assembly station or a message on the screen of the computer's secondary system. The assembly workstation 110 also includes a device for inserting the front mold 40 into the hole 30 in the pad 20, and the device is preferably a movable robot arm. Other devices (not shown) that have the same function as the front phantom 40 are inserted, including the operator manually moving and inserting it into the front phantom, and using skateboards, pneumatic tools, linear motors, and gantry hanger arms. And similar devices. The moving arm used in the preferred embodiment raises the front phantom placed on the front phantom fixing chuck 1 2 0 and pushes it axially toward the first phantom 22 of its own Within the hole 30 of the pad body 20, up to the rear surface 54 of the front mold body 40 and the stepped insert 36 of the transition area 34. As mentioned above for the pad body, the transition zone 34 is to fix the front phantom 40 at a fixed and known position, and is substantially at the front phantom 40 and the stepped object. A leak-proof seal is formed between 3 and 6. Once the front phantom 40 is properly positioned within the hole 30 of the pad 20, the moving arm will be released from the inserted mode and moved to a distant position, or It is maintained in contact with the front die 40 to support the pad 20 on the rear die / pad fixing chuck 130. In a preferred embodiment, the mobile arm is as shown in Figure 5 and 38. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm). (Fill in this page) Pack --------- L Order-Completed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by 401522 A7-B7 of the Consumer Cooperative Fifth, the description of the invention () The one shown in Figure 10 has a pneumatic grip The robotic arm 1 6 _0_ of 1 6 2 is a detachable person who is in contact with the front surface 4 2 of the front mold body 40 in a detachable manner. An example of the robotic arm 160 is a product called Mitsubishi (r) Electric with the trade name "Movemaster RV-M2". The computer secondary system guides and directs all operations of the robotic arm 160. The robot arm 160 may also include an internal computer that interfaces with the computer subsystem to control the robot arm 160. Please refer to Fig. 10, the system of the robot arm 160 is placed inside the surface of the hood 102. A shoulder 16 is in contact with the upper arm of the main body of the robotic arm 160, and it is a person in contact with a forearm 16 7 through an elbow 16 6. The pneumatic grip 16 2 is in contact with the forearm 16 7 of the robotic arm 16 at a running part 1 68. The robotic arm 160 can be rotated horizontally at the pivot point at the bottom, and it can be vertically raised and lowered by moving its shoulders 16, elbow 1 6 and wrist_portion 1 6 8 of the robotic arm. , So it has an omnidirectional range of motion. A wrist part located between and connected between the pneumatic grip 16 2 and the abdomen 16 8 is a tool piece 16 9 which can be rotated in all directions for the pneumatic grip 16 2. The robotic arm 160 provides five degrees of freedom, it does not include the hand and a large amount of memory, and is driven by a DC servo motor (not shown), and contains a full set of Pneumatic line (not shown). In a specific embodiment of the present invention, the robot arm 160 enables the front mold body 40 to be 39 when it is moved into the hole 30 of the pad body 20. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 public love) &lt; Please read the note f on the back before filling this page) Γ — ll · Order · '-! Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 401522 V. Description of the invention () Oriented in a predetermined direction, regardless of its initial placement on the front phantom fixing clamp 1 What direction is it at 20:00? That is, the mechanical arm 1 β 0 will distort the front phantom 40 within the hole 3 0 as required to a predetermined direction corresponding to the pad body 20. The front phantom 40 must be marked by means of a device detachable by the robot arm 160, so that the robot arm 160 can have a reference point. The assembly station 110 preferably has a device for inserting the rear mold body 50 into the hole 20 of the pad body 30. It is for the rear mold body / cushion fixing chuck 1 3 0—part of the rear mold body insertion device preferably has another hole 3 0 which can be used for the rear mold body 50 from the cushion body 2 0 Device to be removed. In this way, a rear phantom insertion device can either remove the rear phantom 50 from the hole 30, or it can move it into the hole 30. The rear phantom inserting device preferably has a movable piston i 3 4 which is designed to contact a part of the rear phantom 50 in a detachable manner, such as its rear surface 5 4 And, the rear mold body 50 can be moved out of the hole 30 of the cushion body 20 or the rear mold body 50 can be moved into the hole 30 of the cushion body 20. In more detail, the rear phantom insertion device includes a phantom support piece i 3 6 which is in contact with the rear surface 54 of the rear phantom 50 in a severely separated manner, and a kind of The phantom supporting sheet 1 3 6 is in contact with each other, and is a device for moving the phantom supporting sheet 1 3 6. The movable phantom supporting sheet 1 3 6 of the rear phantom 50 is covered by the supporting lip 1 32 of the rear phantom / pad fixing chuck 1 3 0. 40 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) .Μ ---- ^ ---- ^ --------- β (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again.) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7. And a receding position, and at this insertion position, the phantom supporting piece 1 3 6 and the supporting lip 1 3 2 have the same height. At the receding position as shown in FIG. 8 'the phantom support piece will move or retreat to a support frame 1 3 8 and the frame 1 3 8 has a plurality of uprights, and at the support lip 1 3 2 and a supporting post 1 3 9 extending between the cylindrical fixing pieces 14 0. The phantom support piece 1 3 6 is adjacent to the cylindrical fixing piece 1 40 when it is in the fully retracted position. One of the "T" pistons 1 3 4 that can move within the pneumatic cylinder 1 4 2 A part is fixedly connected to the phantom supporting sheet 1 3 6. Although other driving devices (such as electric coils) can be used, the "T &quot; piston 1 3 4 is preferably pneumatically controlled and supplied to a pneumatic cylinder 1 4 2 via a suitable air port The air pressure reacts. That is to say, the piston 1 3 4 series can correspond to a compressed air supplied by a first port 1 4 4 and move upward in the cylinder 1 4 2, and correspond to a kind of A compressed air supplied by a second port 1 4 6 moves downwards. The phantom supporting piece 1 3 6 will move the attached piston 1 3 4 correspondingly when the rear phantom 50 and the pad 2 When 0 is placed on the rear phantom / pad fixing clip rhyme 1 3 0, the rear phantom 50 is close to the phantom support sheet 1 3 6. A plurality of vacuum ports connected to a vacuum source (not shown) 1 4 8 is installed inside the phantom support sheet 1 3 6. When the phantom support sheet 1 36 is in the insertion position, the vacuum port 1 4 8 system and the rear phantom 5 0 The rear surface is connected with 5 4 and it is based on the paper standard of CNS A4. 210 X 297 male feet) ~ one (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Pack --- ^ ---- ^ Order --------- line 401522 A7 Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Industrial and consumer cooperation Du printed B7 V. Description of the invention () The vacuum source is moved to create a suction force acting on the rear surface 54. This suction force is sufficient to place the rear mold body 50 on the support body of the mold body When the 1 36 series moves to the receding position, it is pulled out from the hole 30 and separated from the hole 30. That is, the rear phantom 50 is pulled away by activating a vacuum source The hole is 30, and the phantom support piece 1 3 6 can be moved to the receding position. In a specific embodiment, when the rear phantom 50 is receded from the cushion body 20, the machine is almost the machine The arm 1 60 moves the front phantom 40 from the front phantom fixing chuck 120, and inserts it through the first end point 22 of the pad 20. The invention simultaneously It also includes a device for rotating the pad support device relative to the meridional axis L of the pad body 20. A surface of the scattering phantom is provided on different axes. Different radii. Anyone familiar with this art knows that the directivity of the rear phantom 50 with respect to the front phantom 40 is very important, especially for a curvature designed to produce multiple focal points. For the front phantom of the lens》 Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the relative rotational position of the rear phantom 50 with respect to the front phantom 40, and this situation is when the rear phantom system is in a backward position and a rotation is used It may happen from time to time. Rotating device & computer system that guides one of the supporting lips 1 3 2 or the phantom supporting sheet 1 3 6 so that it can be separately The body 20 or the rear phantom 50 is rotated or twisted to a predetermined angle. Compressed air will then push the piston 1 3 4 and the phantom support piece 1 3 6 to the insertion position. In this way, the rear phantom 5 42 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) Love ί1 'outfit --------- ^ Order ·! .------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 _______B7__ 5. Description of the invention () 0 Will be inserted again into the hole 30 of the pad body 20 in the direction it rotates. Therefore, when the rear mold body 50 is inserted into the hole 30 of the pad body 20 again, Its position will be in a predetermined direction of rotation with respect to the front phantom 40, and this will provide the scattered rear phantom 50 with an appropriate directionality with respect to the front phantom 40. At present, most Fortunately, the lip portion 1 3 2 ′ is rotated to support the pad body 20 and the front mold body 40, instead of rotating the mold body support piece 136 holding the rear mold body 50. The present invention It is preferable that the device has a device for determining the size of a selected rear phantom, more specifically, the height of the rear phantom 50. The present The specific embodiment is based on the above matters. Among them, the size of the front phantom is within a certain tolerance range, and the size is considerably improved because of the honing technology used to form the front phantom. Therefore, it is generally quite accurate. However, those aforementioned matters are not as accurate for the rear phantom, especially when the rear mold system is placed horizontally, the thickness of its center or It is quite inaccurate in terms of height. That is to say, the thickness from the rear surface 54 of the rear phantom 50 to the front surface 5 2 of the rear phantom 50 to form the same type of lens can vary in thickness. There is a slight difference between the rear phantoms. The tolerance between the rear phantoms is the largest variable in the formation of the lens, and in fact it can be as large as 0 · 0 5 and this is forming the correct lens The smallest tolerance that can be tolerated. Because of this, the present invention uses a determination device. In order to determine the height of the rear phantom 50, in some specific embodiments 43 (please read the back first Please fill in this page again.) -------------------- Order -------- The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Economics and Industry cooperate with Du Du to print this standard. The standard is applicable to Chinese national standards. (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) &quot; 401522 A7 B7 V. The description of the device in the description () includes an optically accommodated at least the rear when it is in the back position A part of the image of the shape of the phantom 50, a device for digitizing information such as the height or thickness of the rear phantom 50. The generating device generates a connection to a computer subsystem Communication signal and stored in its memory subsystem. A super machine 14 9 (preferred optical receiving device) is in a position where the rear phantom 50 can be viewed when the rear phantom 50 is moved to the backward position. C CD or similar ancestral machine 149 will record the image of the back phantom 50, and then the digital device and the generating device are used to determine the height of the back phantom 50. The ancestral machine 1 4 9 can also use gain control (an automatic iris) or similar objects to ensure that the image reception of the rear phantom is quite good. The data device may be a lens grabber (not shown), and it is also known as a capture board. A specific embodiment of the other data device is a data ancestor, which is used to replace the analog ancestor and the lens grabber, a scanable linear sensor, and the like. The generating device and the data device can also be integrated into a component. In another specific embodiment of the present invention, the phantoms 40 and 50 can be measured in advance and marked with a mark to represent the measurement. The operator inspects the mark, and the mark transfers the same size as the rear phantom 50 before placing the rear phantom 50 on the rear phantom / pad fixing chuck 1 3 0. Signal to computer subsystem. The mark can be marked on the surface of a phantom by ink (for example, the front surface 5 2 of the rear phantom 50). In this case, the mark will be printed on 44 paper standards applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 Gongchu) (please read the “Notes on the back side before filling out this page”) i Install ---- ^ ---- ^ Order --------- Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the employee consumer cooperative. Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printed by the employee consumer cooperative. This mark is replaced on the surface of the phantom before it is used to make another lens. The mark imprinted on the lens will be at the position where it was cut when the lens was made. Similarly, the rear surface 5 4 of the rear mold body 50 itself is made in an etchable manner to make an indication corresponding to a mark to be imprinted on the front surface 52. Because in this specific embodiment, the computer secondary system does not know which one of the plurality of rear phantoms 50 to use to make the required lens curvature, the computer secondary system is required to be able to store and use it. A large number of look-up tables are used in conjunction with each specific phantom characteristic. If the system uses, for example, a thousand phantoms, it would be very convenient to use a monitor 1 4 9 to monitor each rear phantom 50 or to obtain the required information from this mark. Therefore, for each rear phantom 50, its height has been determined, and this determined height will be calculated later to obtain the required axis between the phantoms 40 and 50. Separate the distance and use this to get the correct thickness of the lens you need. That is, the height determined by the rear phantom 50 is used to define the distance that the phantoms 40, 50 move axially within the holes 30 of the pad 20. When the combined procedure is continued, the rear phantom 50 is re-inserted so as to be adjacent to the rear end 24 of the pad 2′0, which is also relative to the calculated axial separation distance. It is not necessary to leave the slot 31 formed by the two phantoms 40, 50, and the hole 30, because the rear phantom 50 is inserted only a short distance within the hole 30. As described below, the charging station 2 0 0 preferably includes a method for applying the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) to the 45 paper size (please read the note on the back first) (F-item, please fill out this page) Install ------- l · Order · '-------- Around A7 B7 401522 V. Description of the invention () The rear phantom 5 within the hole 3 0 〇 The device moved to the axial separation distance from the front phantom 40. Therefore, the axial separation distance between the rear phantom 50 and the front phantom 40 is not at the bonding station 110 very important. In another embodiment of the present invention, the rear phantom 50 is inserted into the hole 30 in a complementary manner, and is moved to the square phantom using the rear phantom insertion device. The distance between 40 is the required axial separation distance. Although it is not required, it is still necessary to exclude the slot 31 when using a needle or other device in the adjustment of another specific embodiment of the present invention, so as to ensure that when moving towards each other At this time, the two phantoms 40 and 50 can still be accurately matched with respect to the inner surface 32 of the hole 30. The final chuck of the assembly station 110 is for holding and fixing the chuck 150. A device for fixing the phantoms 40 and 50 within the hole 30 is one stored on the holding fixture chuck 150. The holding fixture chuck 150 has a circular groove, and its shape is capable of accommodating the pad body 20. The stabilizing device for the lens forming assembly 10 can be optionally added here. The stabilizing device can stably fix each mold II within the holes 30 of the pad body 20 relative to each other. Therefore, after the phantoms 40 and 50 are moved axially at the filling station 200 at a required distance, the stabilizing device firmly holds the two phantoms 4 0, 50, so that the relative position in between will not change. According to this, in the specific embodiment of the present invention, the stabilizing device is a pad placed at 150 ° of the holding fixture chuck ______ 46 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) ^ i721 () x 297 male Love) Install ----'---- ^ Order. | -------- Transfer (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The outer surface 2 6 of the body 20 is fixed around the charging station 200. Referring to FIG. 9, a preferred embodiment of the ear-fixing device is an axial clip 1 5 2, which can maintain the cover by surrounding and fastening the outer surface 26 of the pad body 20. Position of phantom 40, 50. The clip 1 5 2 has a band-like portion 1 5 6 and a crank lock 15 8 for locking the band-like portion. The locked band-shaped part presses the body of the cushion body 20 inward to ensure that the two phantoms 40, 50 do not change each other's position, and strengthens the cushion body 20 and the phantom 40, The seal formed between 50. However, the friction force between the cushion body 20 and the two phantoms 40 and 50 cannot exclude one phantom when the monomer shrinks during storage and cannot be moved from one phantom to another ( For example, the rear mold body 50 in the embodiment of the stepped cushion body). Another advantage of the axial clip 1 5 2 is that it can also provide a mechanical arm 1 60 or a handle member 1 5 4 used by an operator when the lens forming assembly 10 is processed. It is, for example, a crankshaft or other protrusion. When all components are aligned at the assembly station 1 1 0, the robot arm 1 6 0 moves the pad body 2 0 and the two phantoms 40, 50 from the rear phantom / pad The body holding chuck 130 moves to 150 holding the holding chuck. The robotic arm 16 is simultaneously tied to the holding fixture chuck 150 when necessary, and the pad body 2 is twisted before the lens forming assembly 10 is inserted into the axial clip 1 5 2 »If, the The mat 20 is distorted when the rear phantom 50 is in a contracted position. The 47 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS &gt; A4 size (210 X 297 mm)) (Please read W first Note on the back, please fill in this page) -1 SM .---- * ----------- Line A7 B7 401522 V. Description of the invention () Robotic arm 1 6 0 From 20 to the holding fixture chuck 150, the pad body 20 will be rotated, so that the pad body 20 will be in the required direction in advance. Because of the rotation, the pad body 2 Ports 3, 8 and 9 of 0 are in the correct position so that the injection needle 2 5 2 and the discharge needle 2 3 2 can be inserted at the filling station 2 0 0, and the flat top is in place. The charging station 2 0 0 is used to prevent the occurrence of bubbles that are essentially facing upwards. If the flat top is not oriented correctly, it is because of the high energy zone existing on its edge surface tension Therefore, there will be a tendency to catch bubbles on its edges. At the same time, the axial clip 1 5 2 may include a plurality of openings (not shown) passing through it, one of which is connected to port 3 of the cushion body 20 8 and 3 9. The injection needle 2 5 2 is inserted in one opening, and the discharge needle 2 3 2 is inserted in the other opening, so the two needles 2 3 2, 2 5 2 can be inserted. Communicate with the individual ports 38, 39 of the mat body 20. Another embodiment of the present invention does not use a stabilizing device. The mat body should be thicker, and the mold body should be closer It is housed in the cushion body to ensure that no leakage occurs. This specific embodiment has no urgent need because of the automated procedures used. The charging station combines the cushion body 2 in the combination workstation 1 1 0 After the phantoms 40, 50, and the axial clamp 15 2, the robotic arm 160 transfers the formed lens assembly to the charging station 2 0 0, as shown in Figure 11 .The robot arm 160 operating in the assembly station is from the imaginary line 48 &amp; Zhang ruler Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) / i Μ ---- 一 --- l · ------- ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 Α7 ______ Β7 V. Description of the invention (). At the same time, the robotic arm moved to another workstation 2000 is also represented by the imaginary line. Now see 12 to 14, the charging work station 2 0 0 preferably has a device for supporting the lens forming structure 10 and an axial movement of the lens forming structure 40 relative to the front phantom 40. A device from the rear phantom 50 to a predetermined distance among a plurality of axial separation distances between the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 (for example, the rear phantom 50 is moved to the stepped type) The inside of the pad). If the upright wall cushion body is used instead of the stepped cushion body, the front mold body 40 can also be selectively moved. The charging station 2 0 0 has an upright support plate 2 1 0 which is arranged to support a top frame 2 1 2 and a bottom frame 2 1 4. The top frame 2 1 2 is to support the exhaust assembly 2 3 0, and the bottom frame 2 1 4 is to support the refill assembly 2 50. The axially moving device preferably has a cylindrical piston 2 2 0 'and one end thereof is in contact with the phantom, thereby sliding within the hole 30. A linear actuator 2 2 2 or servo motor for generating an output is placed at the bottom of the frame and includes a ball-shaped screw (not shown) and a sliding block (not shown) on the screw. (Shown) ¾ across it. A device for mechanically coupling the linear starter 2 2 2 with the piston 2 2 0, or more specifically, a linear starter 2 2 2 for a coupler 2 2 4 The output is converted into the movement of the piston 220. The piston 2 2 0 will be placed in the rear die 50 of the inner hole 3 0 of the pad body 50 with respect to the front die 49. The paper size has been used in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ⑵ G χ 297 public love) ( Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Install illr! I. Order --------- Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Employees’ Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy A7 ----: ----- B7_ V. Description of the invention () The body 40 is moved in the axial direction. Figure 13 shows the state of the rear phantom 50 before it is pushed along the hole 30 of the pad body 20, and Figure 14 shows the cylindrical piston 2 2 0 in the rear The state diagram after the phantom 50 is pushed to the front phantom 40. In this way, the distance between the rear phantom 50 and the front phantom 40 and the slot 31 are required. The size of it. An electric or pneumatic power train is used to operate the linear starter 2 2 2. In a specific embodiment, the piston 220 pushes the rear phantom 50 into the hole 30 and faces the front phantom 40, which is relative to pulling the rear phantom 50 ~ Like. That is, when combining at the bonding station 1 1 0, the separation distance between the rear phantom 50 and the square phantom 40 is so large that in order to form a lens, the piston 2 2 0 The pushing force is exerted only on the rear phantom 50. However, a vacuum line (not shown) connected to a vacuum source can pass through the piston 2 2 0, so that a vacuum or vacuum suction can act on the rear surface 54 of the rear phantom 50. To push or pull the rear phantom 50. At the same time, the vacuum line can also ensure that when the piston 220 pushes the rear mold body 50, the piston 220 is tightly coupled with the rear mold body 50, so that the rear mold body 50 will not fall, because if the rear phantom 50 falls, it will cause improper formation of the lens, or the injected monomer will leak out through the rear phantom 50. The charging station 2 0 0 can also include the middle of the front and rear phantoms 4 0, 50 and the hole 3 0, or 50 I: installed ---- ^ ---- ^ Order · 1 -------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 401522 ___B7___ V. Description of the invention () A device for providing liquid communication between the slot 31 and the outside of the outer surface 26 of the pad body 20 is provided. In addition, the filling station 2000 also includes a device for injecting a lens-forming fluid into the slot 31. The aforementioned providing device is a discharge device 2 3 0, and the injection device is a filling device 2 50. The discharge device 230 and the cymbal filling assembly 250 are similar in structure and operation. The discharge station 2 3 0 includes a discharge pin 2 3 2 having a bottom end 2 3 4 and a tip 2 3 6 and the discharge pin 2 3 2 passes through a part of the pad body 20 By. A fluid communication is created between the tip 2 3 6 of the discharge needle 2 3 2 and the bottom 2 3 4, thereby allowing a fluid such as air to circulate therebetween. The ejection station 2 30 includes a device for moving the ejection needle 2 3 2 between a first position and a second position. In the first position as shown in FIG. 14, the tip 2 3 6 of the discharge needle 2 3 2 and the slot 31 form fluid communication, and in the first position shown in FIG. 13 At the two positions, the tip 2 36 series is separated from the pad body 20 and the hole 30 series by a distance. The moving device is preferably a pneumatic cylinder 2 40 driving a cylinder piston 2 4 4 which is in contact with a coupling block 2 4 6. A seed tube support block 2 4 2 supports the edge ejection needle 2 3 2 and is firmly attached to the coupling block 2 4 2. Therefore, the cartridge support block 2 4 2 and the ejection needle 2 3 2 are moved by the cartridge piston 2 4 4. A protective cover (not shown) can selectively cover the tip of the ejection needle 2 3 2 when the ejection needle 2 3 2 is in the second position. 51 @ 张 码 量 &gt; National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page)

裝·!Γ — ΙΓ 訂·'-----— -M 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 該注入裝置,或是塡充總成2 5 0係包括了一種注入 針2 5 2,其係具有一個穿越該墊體2 0的一部份以能夠 和該槽孔3 1之間形成流體相連通的插入端2 5 4、一個 容置端2 5 6,其係設計成可和透鏡形成流體的供應源而 形成流體相連通者,以及一個在其間延伸的通道(未顯示 )。該通道係可讓透鏡形成流體得以由該容置端處移動, 在穿越了該通道後,遠離開該插入端2 5 4而最後進入至 該槽孔31之內。 該塡充總成亦包括了一種用以將該注入針2 5 2在如 第1 4圖所示的一種插入位置以及一個抽回位置之間輸送 的裝置,而在該插入位置內,該注入針2 5 2的插入端2 5 4則係和該槽孔3 1之間形成流體相連通者。在如同第 1 3圖所示的抽回位置內,該插入端係和該墊體2 0而相 隔開一段距離者。該塡充總成的輸送裝置,類似於該排出 總成2 3 0者係包括了一種氣動缸2 6 0、一個嘟筒活塞 2 6 2、一個耦合塊2 6 4以及一個啷筒支撐塊2 6 6。 該注入針2 5 2係和一個塡充管線相連通的塡充導管(未 顯示)接觸在一起。一個保護性覆蓋(未顯示)同時亦可 在其處在抽回位櫃時,得以選擇性地覆蓋著該注入針2 5 2的尖端。 如上所述之機械臂1 6 0可將該透鏡形成結構1 〇移 至該塡充工作站2 0 〇,並且將其固定在該塡充工作站2 0 0的支撐裝置上。該排出針2 3 2被移至該第一位置處 ,而在該處,針2 3 2係被插入於該墊體2 0內部並藉由 52 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) IΜ----.----------錄、------------.---.--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 A7Outfit! Γ — ΙΓ Order · '-----—- M Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Intellectual Property Bureau, and printed by the Consumer Consumption Cooperative of A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention The filling assembly 2 5 0 includes an injection needle 2 5 2 which has an insertion end 2 5 4 which penetrates a part of the pad body 20 so as to be in fluid communication with the slot 31. An accommodating end 2 5 6 which is designed to be in fluid communication with a lens forming fluid supply source and a channel (not shown) extending therebetween. The channel allows the lens-forming fluid to move from the receiving end. After passing through the channel, it leaves the insertion end 2 54 far away and finally enters the slot 31. The filling assembly also includes a device for conveying the injection needle 2 5 2 between an insertion position and a withdrawal position as shown in FIG. 14, and in the insertion position, the injection The insertion end 2 5 4 of the needle 2 5 2 is in fluid communication with the slot 31. In the retracted position as shown in FIG. 13, the insertion end system and the pad body 20 are separated by a distance. The conveying device of the filling assembly is similar to the discharging assembly 2 3 0, which includes a pneumatic cylinder 2 60, a tubular piston 2 6 2, a coupling block 2 6 4 and a pan support block 2 6 6. The injection needle 2 5 2 is in contact with a filling tube (not shown) connected to a filling tube. A protective covering (not shown) can also selectively cover the tip of the injection needle 2 5 2 when it is withdrawn into the cabinet. The robotic arm 160 as described above can move the lens forming structure 10 to the charging station 200 and fix it on the supporting device of the charging station 2000. The ejection needle 2 3 2 is moved to the first position, where the needle 2 3 2 is inserted into the pad body 2 0 and applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification with 52 paper sizes (210 X 297 mm) IMM ----.---------- Record, ------------.---.-------- -(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 401522 A7

五、發明說明() 該墊體2 0的一個埠3 9以和該槽孔3 1相連通。該排出 針由此而可讓空氣得以由該槽孔3 1處洩出,如此當一個 模體係由該軸向移動裝置而相對於另一個模體而行滑動時 ,其間則會存在著大氣壓力❶ 該電腦次系統則在該前方模體4 0所在之其本身內部 協同的系統內作出標記,而該標記則是靠近於在該墊體2 0內部的階梯形3 6。附著在該越i啓動器2 2 2之該圓 柱形活塞2 2 0會將該後方模體5 0予以滑動,以獲得所 欲製成透鏡的正確厚度。如上所述者,該電腦次系統係由 該組合工作站1 1 〇的担_機1 4 9所錄製之影像處、或是 由該標記資料以及其他裝置處而獲得該後方模體5 〇正確 的高度。因此,該電腦次系統會直接的導引著準備被推送 的後方模體5 0而朝向著該前方模體4 0行走一段預定的 距離’以形成所需厚度的透鏡,而在其中之該電腦次系統 則係使用著在先前程序中所確定之特定後方模體5 〇的厚 度。若是需求更精準的精確度,則該電腦次系統則會調整 軸向的分離距離,以將在該單體於显北_時所會發生的收縮 情形考慮進去(其大約是爲其體積的百分之1 〇到百分之 15)。在軸向移動該後方模體50之後,該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0係處在相對於彼此之間正確的旋轉 方位,而且彼此之間係分離著一段預定的軸向距離。 在程序中的下一步驟則是將該透鏡形成流體予以注入 (也就是該流體單體)至該槽孔3 1之內。該排出針2 3 2係已和該槽孔3 1之間形成連通,最好是位在最高的位 53 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (靖先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝----^----^訂·1'-------線 經濟部智.«.財產局員工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 401522 A7 ___B7 _ 五、發明說明() 置處,而該注入針2 5 2則是插入於另一個埠3 8之內以 可和該槽孔3 1之間形成連通。而該單體則係藉由該注入 針2 5 2而注入至該槽孔3 1之內。本發明係可,使得該單 體得以藉由有效的注入以及塡充而充滿該槽孔31之內, 不論該前方模體以及該後方模體4 0、5 0之間的軸向分 離距離,以及所欲使用之單體的量是有多少。 如同在第1 3圖以及在第1 4圖中所顯示者,該墊體 2 0所在的位置係處於其注入埠3 8係位在該排出埠3 9 的下方者,如此一來,所有可能會在該單體於注入至該槽 孔3 1內部時所可能發生的氣泡都將會有效的予以排出β 但是,由於塡充以及注入的速率是如此的慢,所以並沒有 任何氣泡產生。 該塡充工作站2 0 0係包括了一種用以偵測由一種注 入裝置而注入之單體高度的裝置。該偵測裝置最好是包括 了一種和該排出針2 3 2而相連通,且係用以在該針2 3 2之尖端2 3 6處、或是在該槽孔3 1處產生一種次大氣 壓的裝置,以及一種亦是和該排出針2 3 2而相連通,且 係用以感測在體積內部壓力的裝置。該排出針2 3 2藉由 一個第一管線2 4 8而和一個真空源(未顯示)相連接, 而該第一管線2 4 8則係藉由一個位在該排出針2 3 2內 部且係距離該尖端2 3 6大約一又二分之一英吋遠的排出 口來將空氣抽出,如此一來則可將在該尖端2 3 6內部的 氣壓或是在該槽孔31內部的氣壓予以降低至低於一大氣 壓的壓力-藉此而產生些許的真空。爲了說明方便,該第 54 表紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) &quot; ίΊ----.---r ------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 491522 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 B7 五、發明說明() 一管線2 4 8顯示時係比較佳實施例所顯示者較接近於該 排出針2 3 2的底端2 3 4。一個用以偵測真空之第二管 線(未顯示)亦是和—個真空源(未顯示)而接觸。 當液體單體被注入至該槽孔31內部而到達位在該槽 孔3 1內部最高位置處之該排出針2 3 2時,真空感測器 偵測到壓力的增加(真空降低)’而此則啓動了電腦次系 統關閉單體的塡入。凡是熟於此項技藝者均知,所損失單 體的量僅爲幾毫克,而此部份則係用以塡充該針2 3 2之 小部份所需者。在比較下’在習用技藝中所損失的單體量 是較本發明的幾倍大。 所使用的真空可以稍微較大氣壓力爲低。但一個較低 的壓力並不是必須,因爲該真空的主要目的係在於作爲塡 充感測,而不是在於幫助塡充。也就是說,若是在該槽孔 3 1之內存在著真空,則可在塡充時減少氣泡形成的機會 ,但這種好處在將該槽孔3 1和外界大氣相通時,並不明 顯。 凡是熟於此項技藝者均知,當該墊體2 0係係充滿著 單體時係可使用其他型式的感測器,諸如是一種電眼(未 顯示)、其他光學感測器(未顯示)或是類似的物件。 對於電腦次系統而言,另種進行塡充過程的方法則是 去計算注入至該槽孔3 1內部單體的體積,並且在計算好 了的體積已加入了槽孔3 1之中後,停止對其塡充。所以 在這一個不同的方法中使用感測器係具有選擇性的。同時 ’在該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0彼此以軸向而移 55 本紙張尺度遇用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -----------裝----'—P 訂l·-------_ (請先Μ讀背面之江意事項典填寫本頁&gt; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 __B7____ 五、發明說明() 向對方之前將欲注入之單體的體積予以計算好是必須的’ 因爲如此一來在該前方模體以及後方模體4 〇、5 0係處 在預定的軸向分離距離時,該槽孔3 1將會充滿著該單體 0 該排出針以2 3 2以及該注入針2 5 2之進入墊體2 0內部的位置是可以不同的。在較佳的實施例中,該針2 3 2、2 5 2係軸向地穿越過該墊體2 0的一部份,而直 到其各別的尖端係和一個埠3 8、3 9而呈流體相連通的 關係爲止。該埠亦是和該槽孔3 1之間形成流體相連通的 關係。這種設計在一個實施例中是特別的有利,因爲其中 ,個別的針2 3 2、2 5 2係以垂直的方式而穿越過該墊 體2 0而到達該外部表面2 6,如此,該針的尖端部份即 實質地進入了該槽孔3 1之內了。在形成一種具有低曲率 的透鏡時,若是該前方模體4 0以及該後方模體5 0彼此 間係軸向地分開一小段距離的話,將該排出針2 3 2或是 該注入針2 5 2的一部份予以插入將會導致在這一個實施 例中形成問題。同樣地,在如同是第4圖中所顯示的一種 具有環形環6 0的模體可用在一小段的分離距離上。 在完成了塡充後,則將針2 3 2、2 5 2予以抽回, 且該墊體2 0則係由密封裝置予以密封,其中,最好的則 是由該墊體2 0本身材料之自我的密封。該鎖固裝置之軸 向夾子1 5 2此時則予以鎖緊,以便將該模體4 0、5 0 予以固定在該孔洞3 0之內且係以一預定的分離距離相距 著。凡是熟於此項技藝者均知該軸向夾子1 5 2係可選擇5. Description of the invention () A port 39 of the mat body 20 is in communication with the slot hole 31. The ejection pin thereby allows air to escape through the slot 31, so that when a mold system slides with respect to the other mold body by the axial movement device, there will be atmospheric pressure in the meantime.电脑 The computer sub-system makes a mark in the internally coordinated system where the front phantom 40 is located, and the mark is close to the stepped shape 36 inside the pad body 20. The cylindrical piston 2 2 0 attached to the actuator 2 2 2 will slide the rear mold body 50 to obtain the correct thickness of the lens to be made. As mentioned above, the computer sub-system is obtained from the image recorded by the combined workstation 1 1 10 and the machine 14 49, or from the mark data and other devices to obtain the rear phantom 5 0 correctly. height. Therefore, the computer sub-system directly guides the rear phantom 50 to be pushed and walks a predetermined distance toward the front phantom 40 to form a lens of a desired thickness, among which the computer The secondary system uses the thickness of the specific rear phantom 50 determined in the previous procedure. If more precise precision is required, the computerized sub-system will adjust the axial separation distance to take into account the shrinkage that will occur when the monomer is at Xianbei_ (which is about one hundred of its volume). 10 to 15 percent). After the rear phantom 50 is moved axially, the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 are in a correct rotational orientation relative to each other, and are separated from each other by a predetermined axial distance. . The next step in the procedure is to inject the lens-forming fluid (ie, the fluid monomer) into the slot 31. The ejection pin 2 3 2 has communicated with the slot hole 31, preferably at the highest position 53. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Jingxian (Please read the notes on the back and fill in this page) -Install ---- ^ ---- ^ Order · 1 '------- The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Consumer Cooperatives, the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Property Bureau Shellfish Consumer Cooperative 401522 A7 ___B7 _ 5. The description of the invention () is placed, and the injection needle 2 5 2 is inserted into another port 38 to form between the slot 3 1 Connected. The monomer is injected into the slot 31 by the injection needle 2 5 2. The present invention is capable of enabling the monomer to fill the slot 31 by effective injection and filling, regardless of the axial separation distance between the front mold body and the rear mold body 40, 50, And what is the amount of monomers to be used. As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the pad body 20 is located at the position where the injection port 38 is located below the discharge port 3 9. In this way, all possible The bubbles that may occur when the monomer is injected into the slot 31 will be effectively discharged. However, since the rate of filling and injection is so slow, no bubbles are generated. The charging station 200 includes a device for detecting the height of a single body injected by an injection device. The detection device preferably includes a type that is in communication with the ejection needle 2 3 2 and is used to generate a secondary point at the tip 2 3 6 of the needle 2 3 2 or at the slot 31. An atmospheric pressure device, and a device which is also in communication with the discharge needle 2 3 2 and is used to sense the pressure inside the volume. The discharge needle 2 3 2 is connected to a vacuum source (not shown) through a first line 2 4 8, and the first line 2 4 8 is connected to the inside of the discharge needle 2 3 2 and The air outlet is about one and a half inches away from the tip 2 3 6 to extract air, so that the air pressure inside the tip 2 3 6 or the air pressure inside the slot 31 can be drawn out. It is reduced to a pressure below one atmosphere-thereby creating a slight vacuum. For the convenience of explanation, the paper size of Form 54 applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) &quot; ίΊ ----.--- r ------- (Please read the back first Please note this page and fill in this page again) 491522 A7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics B7 V. Description of the invention The bottom end of 2 2 3 4. A second line (not shown) for detecting a vacuum is also in contact with a vacuum source (not shown). When the liquid monomer is injected into the slot 31 and reaches the discharge needle 2 3 2 located at the highest position inside the slot 31, the vacuum sensor detects an increase in pressure (vacuum decrease) 'and This starts the computer's secondary system to shut down the unit. Anyone familiar with this technique knows that the amount of monomer lost is only a few milligrams, and this part is used to fill a small part of the needle 2 3 2 required. In comparison, the amount of monomer lost in conventional techniques is several times larger than that of the present invention. The vacuum used can be slightly larger and the air pressure is low. However, a lower pressure is not necessary because the main purpose of the vacuum is to act as a charge sensor, not to assist the charge. That is, if there is a vacuum in the slot 31, the chance of bubble formation can be reduced during charging, but this benefit is not obvious when the slot 31 is communicated with the outside atmosphere. Anyone skilled in this art knows that when the 20 series of pads are full of monomers, other types of sensors can be used, such as an electric eye (not shown), other optical sensors (not shown) ) Or something similar. For the computer secondary system, another method of performing the filling process is to calculate the volume of the monomer injected into the slot 31, and after the calculated volume has been added to the slot 31, Stop charging them. So using sensors in this different approach is selective. At the same time, 'the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 are shifted from each other in the axial direction by 55. This paper size meets the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ------ ----- 装 ----'— P Order l · -------_ (Please read the Jiang Yi Code on the back and fill out this page &gt; Printed by the Employee Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 __B7____ 5. Description of the invention () It is necessary to calculate the volume of the monomer to be injected before the other party, because the front phantom and the rear phantom 4 and 50 are on the predetermined axis. At the separation distance, the slot 3 1 will be filled with the monomer 0. The position of the ejection needle entering the inside of the cushion body 20 by 2 3 2 and the injection needle 2 5 2 may be different. In the embodiment, the needles 2 3 2, 2 5 2 axially pass through a part of the pad body 20, and are in fluid communication with each other until their respective tips are connected to a port 3 8, 39. The port is also in a fluid communication relationship with the slot 31. This design is particularly advantageous in one embodiment because the individual needles 2 3 2, 2 5 2 passes through the pad body 20 in a vertical manner to reach the outer surface 26. Thus, the tip portion of the needle substantially enters the slot 31. After forming a kind of For a lens with a low curvature, if the front phantom 40 and the rear phantom 50 are axially separated from each other by a short distance, the ejection needle 2 3 2 or a part of the injection needle 2 5 2 Insertion of the part will cause a problem in this embodiment. Similarly, a phantom with a ring ring 60 as shown in Fig. 4 can be used at a small separation distance. After completing 塡After filling, the needles 2 3 2, 2 5 2 are withdrawn, and the pad body 20 is sealed by a sealing device. Among them, the best is the self-sealing of the pad body 20 itself. The axial clip 1 5 2 of the locking device is now locked in order to fix the phantoms 40, 50 within the hole 30 and are separated by a predetermined separation distance. Any Those skilled in the art know that the axial clip 1 5 2 is optional

I 56 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) !裝----.---訂」-------妗 (猜先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 A7 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 B7 五、發明說明() 性地在該軸向移動裝置將該後方模體5 0以相對於該前方 模體4 0的方式而定位在正確的位置上,且係在該單體注 入之前而予以鎖緊。 本發明係可使用複數個塡充工作站2 0 0以及總成工 作站1 1 0。例如,在其中的一個具體實施例中,其係使 用了兩個總成工作站以及兩個同時操作的塡充工作站。一 個單一的機械臂可將一個透鏡形成總成予以組合起來,同 時’另一個透鏡形成總成則係在該塡充工作站處以單體予 以注入其中。該機械臂會將剛完成的透鏡形成總成結構輸 送到塡充工作站處來塡充,並將其移動到單體注入的地方 ,而後則將下一個透鏡形成總成組合起來。此一程序會持 續的下去而重覆不斷。在另一個具體實施例中則係使用了 四個工作站以及兩個機械臂,其中的一個機械臂係用來組 合以及將該透鏡形成總成輸送到該塡充工作站,而另—個 機械臂則係用來卸載該塡充工作站。凡是熟於此項技藝者 均知,關於機械臂以及塡充工作站的數量是可輕易地加以 改變的。 固化方法 該機械臂16 0會將注入有單體的透鏡形成總成由該 塡充工作站2 0 0處加以運送到操作者或是另—個自動化 系統處以進行固化單體的程序»本發明的固北_方法係有關 於將該單體暴露在一種紫外線光(U V)下達一預定的時 間,而此一時間則是較習用的方法爲短。暴露在紫外線光 下是此一具體實施例中所使用的步驟。在將該單體暴露於 --------— I— in.---l· ^------I *μ (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 57 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 401522 A7 -_ B7 五、發明說明() 紫外線下後,單體則以一預定的時間來以諸如是紅外線( I R)爐加熱。其次,加熱的步驟固化了該單體,並形成 硬化的聚合透鏡,若是在U V步驟中未能充分固化時。 暴露於UV紫外線光下所需要的時間係介於2 0秒至 3 0秒之間,更好的則是介於3 0秒至兩分鐘之間,最好 的則是介於4 5秒至1又二分之一分鐘之間。暴露於紫外 線光的步驟是藉由將單體放置在複數個紫外線光源之間, 最好的則是每一個均鄰近於該墊體2 0的每一個端點處, 如此,該紫外線光則會穿越過玻璃模體而至該單體,並進 入至該槽孔3 1之內。紫外線光源3 1 2的強度最好是介 於1.2-1-3X l〇-2w/cm2,且波長是爲3 5 0十億分之一公尺 〇 將透鏡形成總成10暴露的程序係可藉由使用如第1 5圖中所示之凰ϋ!工作站3 0 0來完成。操作者將該夾子 1 5 2的手把構件1 5 4和一個可移動的圓柱形桿3 1 0 而相連接,其則可將該夾子1 5 2以及該透鏡形成總成1 0向上移動。在上方的位置處,該兩個模體4 0、5 0係 均暴露於一個紫外線光源3 1 2,如此一來,紫外線光則 會在其間穿越,並和該單體互起反應。電腦次系統或是其 他自動或是手勤的裝置則會啓動該紫外線光源312達預 定的時間,而在該段時間後,可移動之該圓柱形桿3 1 0 會降低其高度,如此,操作者則可將該夾子1 5 2以及該 透鏡形成總成1 0予以移開。 由於本發明之墊體獨特的設計,故而本發明所使用的 58 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先闓讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁&gt; 裝 ---'---Γ 訂---------^ 401522 Δ7 Α7 -_ Β7 五、發明說明() 凰北_方法較習用的方法爲快、較簡單,且更有效率。此種 凰化方法完全的將該單體予以固化,並且減低作用在里北· &amp;單體上的壓力,因此固化後的诱鏡會較之於使用習用技 藝之透鏡來的更爲強硬。當該單體被固化時,其體積會縮 小達到1 0到1 5個百分比時,因爲該後方模體5 0之沿 著該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0而滑移,所以壓力會減少。在習 用之T形墊體內的模體,相對地,不論因爲縮小所造成的 壓力是多少,其均是保持不動的。 分離裝置以及方法 在當該流體的單體被儲存後,固化了的透鏡就必需和 該墊體2 0以及該模體4 0、5 0分離開來。由於該墊體 2 0係具有彈性者,所以夾在其中間之兩個模體4 0、5 0以及該透鏡在軸向夾子1 5 2移開後,將可輕易地予以 由該墊體2 0處滑開。然而,由於該透鏡以及其所接觸之 模體的表面間產生了一種強力的表面彈性,所以要將其分 開是較以往更爲困難了。而本發明亦包括了一種將該模體 4 0、5 0和剛形成之透鏡予以分開的方法以及裝置。 請參看第1 6圖,本發明之分離裝置4 0 0係包括了 —種用以支撐該透鏡以及該模體的裝置’以及一種用以導 向一流體到至少該透鏡或是模體上的裝置。熟於此項技藝 者均知,由於透鏡以及模體係由不同的材質製成,所以該 透鏡以及該模體均具有個別不同的熱膨脹係數。該流體最 好是爲氣體,且其溫度最好是低於剛由熱源(紫外線或是 紅外線爐)移開之該透鏡以及該模體的溫度。氣體的溫度 59 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) — II-I I I 訂 _ι!!_·ίΐί 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 401522 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明() 通常是低於其附近的溫度,而該透鏡以及該模體的溫度則 通常是高於其附近的溫度。 可被加以使用之氣體是包括了有高壓氣體、氧氣、氮 氣以及最佳的二氧化碳(C 02)。被導向裝置所引導的氣 體會將較熱的模體-透鏡-模體的1 0予以冷卻, 而造成玻璃模體以及固的單體收縮。由於玻璃以及冷 卻了的聚合透鏡兩者的熱膨脹係數不同,所以在兩種材料 之間會產生不同的收縮率。然而由於這種不同的收縮比率 ,則可協助破壞存在於該模體4 0、5 0以及該透鏡個別 表面間的鍵結力。凡是熟於此項技藝者均知,若是在該氣 體以及該模體-透鏡-模體的座遷_4 1 0之間存在愈大的 溫度梯度,則會產生愈大的冷卻效果,以及愈有效的將該 透鏡和該模體4 0、5 0相分離。 該導向裝置係包括了一_噴嘴4 1 2,其係和一個具 有較大氣壓力爲大的氣體供應源4 1 8而相連接者。該噴 嘴412係具有一個和該氣體供應源418而形成流體相 連通的進口4 1 4,以及一個出口4 1 6,其係可將氣體 導至該透鏡以及該模體,更詳細地說是導至該透鏡和一個 模體相連接的地方。如下示範所示’每一個噴嘴4 1 2係 具有一個大約裏三毫米的內徑,而此內徑則在到達出口 4 1 6時則會縮減至0.3毫米。此種噴嘴4 1 2可使得存在 其內部的流體產生高速。該導向裝置係包覆著一個噴嘴4 1 2,較佳的是兩個噴嘴,而最佳的則是四個噴嘴4 1 2 ,且每一個噴嘴則是配置在該模體一透鏡-模體的夾層4 60 ί 裝--------Γ-訂 L-------% (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 401522 _B7___ 五、發明說明() 10四個角落,而各自呈90度來配置。第6圖顯示著具 有四個噴嘴的具體實施例。 該支撐裝置係包括了一個水平放置的構件4 2 0,其 係具有一個可用以在其上方支撐透鏡以及模體之上方表面 4 2 2,以及一個相對的下方表面4 2 4。較佳的支撐裝 置同時亦包括了一個旋轉R的軸。本發明尙包括了一個用 以移動選擇該支撐裝置或是相對於另一個的方式而移動該 導向裝置的噴嘴4 1 2的裝置。凡是熟於此項技藝者均知 ,該噴嘴4 1 2係可相對於該模體一透鏡-模體的 1 0而旋轉,該噴嘴4 1 2以及該玄里4 1 0係可在不同 的方向旋轉,抑或是該噴嘴4 1 2以及該玄遷_4 1 0係可 在相同的方向而以不同的速度來旋轉,如此一來,在其間 存在著相對的運動。同時,我們亦應該知道在該導向裝置 以及該支撐裝置之間並不存在著相對運動。 在較佳的實施例中,該支撐裝置係在當該噴嘴4 1 2 維持固定時而圍繞著該旋轉軸R作旋轉,如此該模體-透 鏡—模體的爽遷_4 1 0才可以相對於該噴嘴4 1 2作旋轉 ^ 。用以旋轉該構件4 2 0的裝置最好是包括了一個可產生 | 旋轉輸出之馬達4 3 0以及一個具有相對端點的段落4 3 1 2。該段落4 '3 2的一端係連接於該馬達4 3 0,而該段 % 落4 3 2的另一端則係連接於該構件4 2 0之下方表面4 | 2 4的一部份,如此一來,該馬達4 3 0的輸出可將該構 I 件4 2 0予以圍繞著該旋轉軸R作旋轉。該馬達4 3 〇係 ^ 可藉由電力、空氣壓力或是其他所知的方式來加以驅動。 印 製 I _____ ___ 61 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(2i〇_x 297公爱)-—---- — II--- 裝-----I 訂'·!---^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明() (請先閱讀背面之注項再填寫本頁) 仍請參閱第1 6圖,該噴嘴4 1 2的每一個出口 4 1 6最好是相對於其他的噴嘴412而設置在不同的高度上 ,因爲該噴嘴412至少應有一個出口416是導向於透 鏡以及其鄰近模體之介面,而不論該透鏡的厚度爲何。也 就是說,每一個噴嘴4 1 2可將氣體在模體一透鏡-模體 的夾層4 1 0的邊緣處而導向不同的高度’來將物質予以 冷卻。於聯結時,該旋轉裝置會在該模體-透鏡-模體的 夾層410以及該噴嘴412之間產生相對的旋轉運動。 在該透鏡以及模體介面之間來將氣體予以導向是有目的的 ,因爲氣體會擴張並且在離開該噴嘴412的出口416 後會擴散而覆蓋一個大約是一毫米的垂直高度或是更多’ 其全賴氣體的速度、噴嘴的設計以及該噴嘴4 1 2之出口 4 1 6和該模體一透鏡—模體的1 0之間的分離距 離而定。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消费合作社印製 當二氧化碳(最佳的氣體)係由該透鏡以及該模體4 〇、5 0中的一個間的介面被予以導向時,某些氣體分子 會到達其間的介面。吾人相信,當某些二氧化碳到達該模 體—透鏡一模體的爽層_4 10時會轉變爲&quot;乾冰並且 在穿透鏡以及一個模體之間所存在一個空間後會膨脹。所 產生的膨脹會迨使透鏡以及一個模體彼此分離,此則幫助 了破壞這些元件間密切的接觸關係。穿透了的二氧化碳更 能在透鏡以及模體的介面間來對透鏡和模體作冷卻’以加 速其間所存在的收縮梯度。同時,若發生更大的分離’貝1J 二氧化碳能穿透的更深,以持續其膨脹和冷卻。本發明的 62 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 4015^2 Α7 Β7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明() 裝置以及方法能造成模體和透鏡之間產生分離,而不需要 外界實質的協助或是作用在元件上的機械剪力。 本發明亦可包括了一種用以實質上將選擇了的一個透 鏡或是模體的一部份予以彎折的裝置。較佳的彎折裝置係 包括了至少兩個接觸構件(未顯示),每一個接觸構件具 有一個接觸面,其係以可分離的方式而和透鏡之一個獨立 的部份而接觸,以及一個用以將接觸構件以相對於彼此的 方式而加以移動的裝置,如此,個別的接觸則可分別的對 透鏡彎折。接觸面係可形成爲鈍齒狀、滾花狀或是其他可 防止在該接觸構件以及透鏡的邊緣之間形成滑動的形狀。 該移動裝置係包括了至少一個在於產生一種輸出的啓 動器、一種以機械的方式而將每一個線性啓動器而和個別 的接觸構件相耦合的裝置,以及一種用以激發該啓動器的 裝置。該啓動器的輸出轉換成耦合之接觸構件的移動。因 此,接觸構件的接觸面向內擠壓,以抵抗透鏡的塑膠於變 形時將透鏡擠出玻璃模體之外,也因此其會在彼此間形成 輕微的變形,以破壞其間的表面張力β透鏡相對的邊緣可 放置在一個特殊的位置上,以抵制一個固定的接觸構件或 是其他的接觸構件和一個個別的啓動器相稱合,其中,兩 個啓動器會將萁個別的接觸構件移向彼此。在和使用冷卻 氣體來分離元件的方法比較下,較不需要使得該透鏡產生 變形。 另一種用以將透鏡和模體的裝置則是操作者將各元件 浸入充滿肥皂的水中。這種方法可同時淸洗以及分離該透 63 本紙張尺度適用中囷國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----------·Γ !,裝--------Ρ 訂·!--------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁&gt; 401522 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 鏡和該模體。 在該模體4 0、5 0和固化後的透鏡分離後’該模體 4 0、5 0以及該墊體2 〇可再加以使用或是丟棄°或是 所有的元件再使用的話’操作者可將該後方模體5 0以一 種相對於該墊體2 0之預定的旋轉角度而放置在該墊體2 0之孔洞3 0之內。操作者可使用—種組合固定器5 〇 〇 (如第1 7A圖以及1 7 B圖所示)來協助將該後方模體 5 0予以插入於該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內’以減少實際 上處理該後方模體5 0。 若是該墊體2 0係處於一種良好的狀態的話,則可再 加以使用以形成另一個透鏡。然而,一個墊體2 0的使用 壽限是短於一個玻璃模體的使用壽限的。若是該墊體2 0 需要額外的淸洗或是已被損害的話,則該墊體2 0將會被 丟棄,爾後則會被磨碎以作回收之用。 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 (請先閱讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) 總成固定器5 0 0係具有一個中央部5 1 0,其係設 計成可水平支撐該後方模體5 0的後方者。而圍繞著該總 成固定器5 0 0之中央部5 1 0者則係爲一個具有彈簧的 容置器5 1 2,其係設計成可和該墊體2 0的第二端點2 4相接觸者。而也因此,該中央部5 1 〇支撐著該後方模 體5 0 ’而該会體2 0則係被向下推送以抵制著該具有彈 簧的容置器5 1 2,如此一來,該後方模體5 0則係可插 入於該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內。 該後方模體5 0係被例如是一條繩索而蝕刻於一個在 形成透鏡時(例如是後方表面5 4)並不和該單體相接觸 64 401522 A7 _…. B7 五、發明說明() 的表面上。操作者將該後方模體5 0以一種相對於吻合裝 置的方式而在一種預定的旋轉角度上來加以吻合。相對於 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 該墊體2 0之散射後方透鏡的旋轉角度必須是位在一個已 知的位置上,如此,才可在該總成工作站1 1 0上作角度 的吻合。操作者其後則將該墊體2 0固定在該總成固定器 5 0 0之上,然後則以旋轉的方式來將位在該墊體2 0上 的標記和位在該後方模體5 0上的蝕刻線相吻合》在較佳 的實施例中,當該墊體2 0係位在一個預定的旋轉角度時 ,該墊體2 0才會被該總成固定器5 0 0所接受,如此, 才可確定該墊體2 0以及該後方模體5 0係位在一個相對 於彼此的一個預定的旋轉角度上。凹槽2 8的形成係可確 保該墊體2 0係正確地和該具有彈簧的容置器5 1 2吻合 在一起。第1 7 A圖顯示所有的零件係正確地吻合在一起 〇 經濟部智慧財產局員工濟費合作社印製 -, 第1 7 B圖顯示著操作者係將該墊體2 0在該固定總 成5 0 0上而向下方推送,如此,該後方模體5 0則可容 置於該孔洞3 0的一部份之內。當操作者開始向下方推送 時,該墊體2 0會以抵制彈簧力量的方式而移動,並將該 後方模體5 0予以容置在該孔洞3 0之內》當該後方模體 5 0係以軸向的方式而容置在該孔洞3 0之內達一個預定 的距離時,該墊體2 0的移動則會由該容置器5 1 2加以 阻止,而也因此,其就無法再行壓縮了。該後方模體則因 此會被在一個預定的距離處而被放入於該孔洞3 0之內。 雖然該後方模體5 0在該孔洞3 0內的軸向位置並非 65 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 401522 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消费合作社印製 五、發明說明() 相當重要,但該組合裝置確保了該後方模體5 0能在每一 次均可以同樣地位在同一個位置上,以防止因爲不同的操 作者而產生在位置上的不同°此種方式藉由確保該後方模 體5 0並不會太過深入於該孔洞3 0之內,而防礙了該模 體支撐板1 3 6在組合工作站1 1 0處將該後方模體5 0 予以移至該後退位置處而獲得了改善。凡是熟於此項技藝 者均知,這一個過程均可予以自動化,如此,一個機械臂 或是類似的物件才可將該後方模體5 0以一種已知的旋轉 角度而放入於該墊體2 0的孔洞3 0之內。 由一個處理的角度來看,將該後方模體5 0儲放於該 墊體2 0之內是可以更爲容易的》由於用以形成方鏡的模 體表面4 4、5 2是爲一種活性的表面,所以諸如是操作 者的指紋之污染物將很有可能會毀了這個表面。但是觸摸 該模體4 0、5 0之其他並不是用於形成透鏡的表面4 2 、5 4則不成問題。對於該後方模體5 0面向該墊體2 0 內部的前方表面5 2亦是爲一種活性表面,而其加以處理 的後方表面5 4則並不會形成任何的問題。將該後方模體 5 0予以放置在該孔洞3 0之內會是更爲容易的,如此一 來該活性表面則會受到該墊體2 0的保護,並且藉由該前 方表面4 2來慮理該前方模體,例如是由該機械臂1 6 0 來接觸該前方表面5 2。 該前方模體4 0以及該墊體/後方模體2 0、5 0爾 後則會被移至靠近於該組合工作站110的儲存位置處, 以形成額外的透鏡。操作者會將所有的零件放在一個移動 66 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(2丨Ο X 297公爱) 1111--I •裝·1—-1!.1 訂-l·--I----0 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 五、發明說明() 的輸送帶上。可儲存於一個攜行器內的前方模體4 0則係 被放置在一個輸送帶上,並該墊體/後方模體2 0、5 0 則係放置在另一條輸送帶上。感測器在需要時會感測到零 件接近於該輸送帶的末端時則會停止輸送帶的移動。位在 輸送帶端部的另一名操作者則會將零件放入正確的儲存位 置,如此本發明的步驟則可再度的重覆。 雖然本發明係藉由各種參考的方式以及利用不同的具 體實施例來加以說明其內部的詳細步驟,但其不是在於限 制本發明的範囀,本發明的範疇應是由以下所伴隨的申請 專利範圍來加以限定的。 (靖先W讀背面之注意ί項再填寫本頁) d • i 宇要部份代表符號之簡要說明 10透鏡形成總成 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2 2第一端點 2 6外部表面 3 0孔洞 3 2內部表面 3 6插入階梯 4 0前方模體 4 4後方表面 5 0後方模體 5 4後方表面6 0環 1 0 4框架 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 1 0襯墊 4第二端點 8凹槽 1槽孔 4過渡區 8、3 9埠 2前方表面 6邊緣 2前方表面 6邊緣 0 2機罩 10總成工作站 67 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公爱) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明() 112平板 114軌道 1 1 6驅動缸 1 2 0前方模體固定夾頭 1 2 2唇部 1 2 4空氣孔 1 3 0後方模體/墊體固定夾頭 (請先閱請背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) '政---------訂---7------線· 1 3 2墊體支撐唇 1 3 6模體支撐片 1 3 9支撐柱 1 4 2氣壓缸 1 4 6第二埠 1 4 9相機 1 5 2夾子 1 5 6帶狀部份 1 6◦機械臂 1 6 4肩部 1 6 7前臂 1 6 9腕部工具片 2 2 0活塞 2 2 4耦合器 2 3 2排出針 2 3 6尖端 2 4 2唧筒支撐塊 2 4 6耦合塊 2 5 0塡充總成 2 5 4插入端 1 3 4活塞 1 3 8支撐框架 1 4 0圓柱形固定片 144第一埠 1 4 8真空埠 1 5 0夾持固定夾頭 1 5 4把手構件 1 5 8曲軸鎖 1 6 2氣動抓 1 6 6肘部 1 6 8腕部 2 0 0塡充工作站 2 2 2線性啓動器 2 3 0排出裝置 2 3 4底端 2 4 0氣動缸 2 4 4_筒活塞 2 4 8第一管線 2 5 2注入針 2 5 6容置端 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 401522 * A7 __B7 五、發明說明() 2 6 0氣動缸 2 6 2唧筒活塞 2 6 4耦合塊 2 6 6啣筒支撐塊 3 0 0固化工作站 310圓柱形桿 312紫外線光源 4 0 0分離裝置 410模體—透鏡 一模體的夾層 4 1 2噴嘴 4 1 4進口 4 1 6 出口 418氣體供應源 4 2 0構件 4 2 2上方表面 4 2 4下方表面 4 3 0馬達· 4 3 2段落 5 0 0組合固定器 5 1 0中央部 512容置器 / ^--------^---------^ * I (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁&gt; 亦張瓦度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)I 56 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love)! Loading ----.--- Order "------- 妗 (Guess to read the precautions on the back before reading (Fill in this page) 401522 A7 Printed by B7, Shelley Consumer Cooperative, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () Move the rear phantom 50 in the axial direction relative to the front phantom 40 It is positioned in the correct position and locked before the monomer is injected. The present invention can use a plurality of charging stations 200 and an assembly station 110. For example, in one embodiment, it uses two assembly stations and two simultaneous charging stations. A single robotic arm can combine a lens forming assembly, while another lens forming assembly is injected into the charging station as a single body. This robotic arm will transfer the newly completed lens forming assembly structure to the charging station, move it to the place where the monomer is injected, and then combine the next lens forming assembly. This process will continue and repeat itself. In another specific embodiment, four workstations and two robot arms are used, one of which is used to combine and transport the lens forming assembly to the charging workstation, and the other robot arm is Used to uninstall the docking station. As anyone skilled in the art knows, the number of robotic arms and charging stations can be easily changed. Curing method The robot arm 160 will transport the lens-injected assembly with the monomer from the charging station 200 to the operator or another automated system to perform the procedure for curing the monomer »The present invention The Gubei method is related to exposing the monomer to a type of ultraviolet light (UV) for a predetermined time, and this time is shorter than the conventional method. Exposure to ultraviolet light is the procedure used in this particular embodiment. After exposing the monomer to --------— I—in .--- l · ^ ------ I * μ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 57 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A7 -_ B7 V. Description of the invention () After the ultraviolet rays, the monomers are heated by a predetermined time such as an infrared (IR) furnace. Next, the heating step cures the monomer and forms a hardened polymer lens if it is not sufficiently cured in the U V step. The time required for exposure to UV light is between 20 seconds and 30 seconds, more preferably between 30 seconds and two minutes, and most preferably between 45 seconds and 1 and a half minutes. The step of exposing to ultraviolet light is by placing the monomer between a plurality of ultraviolet light sources, and it is best that each is adjacent to each end point of the pad body 20, so that the ultraviolet light passes through Pass the glass phantom to the monomer, and enter into the slot 31. The intensity of the ultraviolet light source 3 1 2 is preferably between 1.2-1-3X l0-2w / cm2, and the wavelength is 350 billionths of a meter. The procedure for exposing the lens forming assembly 10 may be This is done by using Phoenix! Workstation 3 0 0 as shown in Figure 15. The operator connects the handle member 15 of the clip 15 2 with a movable cylindrical rod 3 1 0, which can move the clip 15 2 and the lens forming assembly 10 upward. At the upper position, the two phantoms 40 and 50 are both exposed to an ultraviolet light source 3 1 2. In this way, the ultraviolet light will pass therethrough and react with the monomer. A computerized sub-system or other automatic or manual device will activate the ultraviolet light source 312 for a predetermined time, and after this period of time, the movable cylindrical rod 3 1 0 will reduce its height. Alternatively, the clip 15 and the lens forming assembly 10 can be removed. Due to the unique design of the cushion body of the present invention, the 58 paper sizes used in the present invention are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page &gt; Install ---'--- Γ Order --------- ^ 401522 Δ7 Α7 -_ Β7 V. Description of the invention () Huang Bei _ method is faster, simpler, and more convenient than the conventional method Efficiency. This method of curing completely cures the monomer and reduces the pressure on the Libei &amp; monomer, so the cured lens will be more effective than the lens using conventional techniques. Tough. When the monomer is cured, its volume will shrink to 10 to 15 percent, because the rear mold body 50 slides along the hole 30 of the cushion body 20, so the pressure will be Reduced. The phantom in the conventional T-shaped cushion body, in contrast, remains immobile regardless of the pressure caused by the reduction. The separation device and method solidify after the monomer of the fluid is stored Lens must be separated from the cushion body 20 and the phantoms 40 and 50. Since the lens The body 2 0 is elastic, so the two phantoms 40 and 50 sandwiched between it and the lens can be easily slid from the cushion body 20 after the axial clip 15 2 is removed. However, since a strong surface elasticity is generated between the lens and the surface of the phantom it contacts, it is more difficult than ever to separate them. The present invention also includes a phantom 4 Method and device for separating 0, 50 and newly formed lens. Please refer to FIG. 16. The separation device 4 0 of the present invention includes a device for supporting the lens and the phantom, and a device. A device for directing a fluid to at least the lens or the phantom. Those skilled in the art know that because the lens and the mold system are made of different materials, the lens and the phantom have individual different Coefficient of thermal expansion. The fluid is preferably a gas, and its temperature is preferably lower than the temperature of the lens and the phantom just removed by a heat source (ultraviolet or infrared oven). The temperature of the gas is 59. This paper is for China National standard( CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) — II-I II order _ι !! _ · ίΐί Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, Printing Wisdom of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau 401522 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention () It is usually lower than the temperature near it, and the temperature of the lens and the phantom is usually higher than the temperature near it. Can be used The gas includes high-pressure gas, oxygen, nitrogen, and the best carbon dioxide (C 02). The gas guided by the guide device will cool the hot mold body-lens-mold 10, which will cause the glass mold Body and solid monomer shrink. Because glass and cooled polymer lenses have different coefficients of thermal expansion, different shrinkage rates occur between the two materials. However, due to this different shrinkage ratio, it can help destroy the bonding forces existing between the phantoms 40, 50 and the individual surfaces of the lens. Anyone skilled in this art knows that if there is a larger temperature gradient between the gas and the phantom-lens-phantom shift_4 1 0, the greater the cooling effect will be, and the more Effectively separate the lens from the phantom 40 and 50. The guide system includes a nozzle 4 1 2 which is connected to a gas supply source 4 1 8 having a large gas pressure and a large gas pressure. The nozzle 412 has an inlet 4 1 4 and an outlet 4 1 6 which are in fluid communication with the gas supply source 418, and can guide gas to the lens and the phantom. To where the lens is connected to a phantom. As shown in the following example ', each of the nozzles 4 1 2 has an inner diameter of about three millimeters, and this inner diameter is reduced to 0.3 mm when it reaches the outlet 4 1 6. Such a nozzle 4 1 2 makes it possible to produce a fluid at a high speed. The guide device is covered with one nozzle 4 1 2, preferably two nozzles, and most preferably four nozzles 4 1 2, and each nozzle is arranged in the mold body and a lens-mould body. Laminated 4 60 ί Loading -------- Γ-Order L -------% (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) A7 401522 _B7___ 5. Description of the invention () 10 four corners, each of which is arranged at 90 degrees. Figure 6 shows a specific embodiment with four nozzles. The supporting device includes a horizontally placed member 4 2 0 having an upper surface 4 2 2 for supporting the lens and the phantom above it, and an opposite lower surface 4 2 4. The preferred support device also includes a shaft that rotates R. The present invention includes a device for moving the nozzle 4 1 2 for selecting the supporting device or moving the guide device relative to the other. As anyone skilled in the art knows, the nozzle 4 1 2 series can rotate relative to the phantom-lens-phantom 10, and the nozzle 4 1 2 and the Xuanli 4 1 0 series can be rotated in different Direction rotation, or the nozzle 4 12 and the Xuanqian _4 10 can rotate in the same direction and at different speeds. In this way, there is relative movement between them. At the same time, we should also know that there is no relative movement between the guide and the support. In a preferred embodiment, the supporting device rotates around the rotation axis R when the nozzle 4 1 2 remains fixed, so that the phantom-lens-phantom transition_4 1 0 can Rotate relative to the nozzle 4 1 2. The means for rotating the component 4 2 0 preferably includes a motor 4 3 0 which produces a | rotation output and a paragraph 4 3 1 2 with opposite ends. One end of the paragraph 4 '3 2 is connected to the motor 4 3 0, and the other end of the paragraph 4 4 2 is connected to a part of the surface 4 | 2 4 below the component 4 2 0, so At the same time, the output of the motor 4 3 0 can rotate the component 4 2 0 around the rotation axis R. The motor 403 can be driven by electricity, air pressure, or other known methods. Printing I _____ ___ 61 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2i〇_x 297 public love) --------- II --- installed ----- I ordered '·!- -^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 401522 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention () (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Still refer to Figure 16 and the nozzle 4 1 Each outlet 4 1 6 of 2 is preferably set at a different height relative to the other nozzles 412, because at least one outlet 416 of the nozzle 412 should be directed to the lens and its interface adjacent to the phantom, regardless of the What is the thickness of the lens. That is, each nozzle 4 1 2 can guide the gas to a different height at the edge of the phantom-lens-mould interlayer 4 1 0 'to cool the substance. During the coupling, the rotating device generates relative rotational movement between the phantom-lens-phantom sandwich 410 and the nozzle 412. It is purposeful to direct the gas between the lens and the phantom interface because the gas will expand and diffuse after leaving the exit 416 of the nozzle 412 to cover a vertical height of approximately one millimeter or more ' It all depends on the speed of the gas, the design of the nozzle, and the separation distance between the outlet 4 1 6 of the nozzle 4 12 and the phantom-lens-phantom 10. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. When carbon dioxide (the best gas) is guided by the lens and the interface between one of the phantoms 40 and 50, some gas molecules will reach between them. interface. I believe that when some carbon dioxide reaches the phantom-lens-mould layer_4 10, it will turn into "Dry Ice" and expand after passing through the lens and a space between the phantoms. The resulting expansion can cause the lens and a phantom to separate from each other, which helps to break the close contact between these components. The penetrated carbon dioxide can cool the lens and the phantom between the lens and the phantom's interface to accelerate the shrinkage gradient that exists between them. At the same time, if a greater separation occurs, the carbon dioxide can penetrate deeper to continue its expansion and cooling. 62 paper sizes of the present invention are applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 4015 ^ 2 Α7 Β7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The separation between the body and the lens does not require substantial outside assistance or mechanical shear forces on the element. The invention may also include a device for substantially bending a selected lens or part of a phantom. The preferred bending device includes at least two contact members (not shown), each contact member having a contact surface which is in separable contact with a separate part of the lens, and a A device that moves the contact members relative to each other. In this way, the individual contacts can respectively bend the lenses. The contact surface may be formed in a blunt shape, a knurled shape, or other shapes that prevent slippage between the contact member and the edge of the lens. The mobile device includes at least one starter for generating an output, a device for mechanically coupling each linear starter with an individual contact member, and a device for activating the starter. The output of the actuator is converted into movement of the coupled contact member. Therefore, the contact surface of the contact member is pressed inward to resist the plastic of the lens from extruding the lens out of the glass phantom when deformed, and therefore it will form a slight deformation between each other to destroy the surface tension between them. The edge of can be placed in a special position to resist a fixed contact member or other contact members to fit into an individual starter, where the two starters move the individual contact members toward each other. In comparison with the method of using a cooling gas to separate the components, it is less necessary to deform the lens. Another device used to immerse the lens and phantom is the operator immersing the components in soapy water. This method can simultaneously wash and separate the transparent 63 paper sizes applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- · Γ !, installed-- ------ P Order ·! -------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page> 401522 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (mirror and the phantom. In this mold After the body 40, 50 and the cured lens are separated, 'the mold body 40, 50, and the pad body 20 can be reused or discarded, or if all components are reused,' the operator can The rear phantom 50 is placed within a hole 30 of the pad 20 at a predetermined rotation angle with respect to the pad 20. The operator can use a combination fixture 5 0 (such as the first 1 7A and 17B) to assist in inserting the rear phantom 50 into the hole 30 of the pad 20 to reduce the actual processing of the rear phantom 50. If it is the pad If the 20 series is in a good condition, it can be used again to form another lens. However, the lifetime of a cushion body 20 is shorter than the lifetime of a glass mold body. If it is the cushion body 2 0 If additional cleaning is needed or has been damaged, the pad 20 will be discarded, and then it will be ground for recycling. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Education Read the note on the back side and fill in this page.) The assembly holder 5 0 0 has a central portion 5 1 0, which is designed to horizontally support the rear of the rear phantom 50. It surrounds the assembly. The central part 5 1 0 of the holder 5 0 is a receptacle 5 1 2 with a spring, which is designed to be in contact with the second end 24 of the pad body 20. Therefore, the central portion 5 1 0 supports the rear mold body 50 'and the assembly body 20 is pushed downward to resist the spring-loaded container 5 1 2. As a result, the rear mold body 5 1 2 The body 50 can be inserted into the hole 30 of the mat body 20. The rear mold body 50 is etched into a lens (for example, the rear surface 5 4). Contact with this monomer 64 401522 A7 _.... B7 V. Description of the invention () on the surface. The operator moves the rear phantom 50 to a Relative to the way of the anastomosis device, anastomosis is performed at a predetermined rotation angle. Relative to (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The rotation angle of the scattering rear lens of the cushion body 20 must be at a In this way, an angular anastomosis can be made on the assembly station 1 1 0. The operator then fixes the mat 20 on the assembly holder 5 0 0, and then Rotate to match the mark on the pad body 20 with the etching line on the rear mold body 50. In a preferred embodiment, when the pad body 20 is located on a predetermined When the angle of rotation of the pad body 20 is accepted by the assembly holder 500, it can be determined that the pad body 20 and the rear mold body 50 are located in a relative to each other. At a predetermined rotation angle. The formation of the groove 28 can ensure that the pad body 20 and the receptacle 5 1 2 with a spring fit correctly. Figure 17A shows that all parts are correctly fitted together. Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-Figure 17B shows that the operator attaches the pad body 20 to the fixed assembly. 500 is pushed up and down, so that the rear phantom 50 can be accommodated in a part of the hole 30. When the operator starts to push downward, the cushion body 20 will move in a manner resisting the force of the spring, and the rear mold body 50 will be accommodated within the hole 30. When the rear mold body 50 When it is contained in the hole 30 in the axial manner for a predetermined distance, the movement of the cushion body 20 will be prevented by the receptacle 5 1 2, and therefore, it cannot be Compress it again. The rear phantom is therefore placed within the hole 30 at a predetermined distance. Although the axial position of the rear phantom 50 in the hole 30 is not 65, the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 401522 A7 B7 Printed 5. Description of the invention () is very important, but the combined device ensures that the rear phantom 50 can be in the same position at the same time every time, in order to prevent different positions caused by different operators. Different ° In this way, by ensuring that the rear phantom 50 does not penetrate too far into the hole 30, it prevents the phantom support plate 1 3 6 from placing the rear at the combination workstation 1 1 0 The phantom 50 was moved to the receded position and improved. Anyone skilled in this art knows that this process can be automated, so that a mechanical arm or similar object can put the rear phantom 50 into the pad at a known rotation angle. The holes in the body 20 are within 30. From a processing point of view, it is easier to store the rear phantom 50 in the cushion body 20 because the phantom surfaces 4 4 and 5 2 used to form the square mirror are a kind of Active surfaces, so contaminants such as operator fingerprints will most likely ruin the surface. However, it is not a problem to touch the other surfaces 4 2, 5 4 of the phantom 40, 50, which are not used to form a lens. The front surface 5 2 of the rear mold body 50 facing the interior of the cushion body 20 is also an active surface, and the rear surface 5 4 treated by it does not cause any problems. It will be easier to place the rear phantom 50 in the hole 30, so that the active surface will be protected by the pad 20, and the front surface 4 2 will be considered. To manage the front phantom, for example, the robotic arm 160 contacts the front surface 52. The front phantom 40 and the pad / rear phantoms 20 and 50 are then moved to a storage position close to the combined workstation 110 to form additional lenses. The operator will put all the parts in one moving 66 paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 〇 X 297 public love) 1111--I • equipment · 1—-1! .1 order-l · --I ---- 0 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () on the conveyor belt. The front phantom 40, which can be stored in a traveler, is placed on a conveyor belt, and the pad / rear phantom 20, 50 is placed on another conveyor belt. The sensor stops the movement of the conveyor when it detects that the part is close to the end of the conveyor when needed. Another operator at the end of the conveyor will place the part in the correct storage location so that the steps of the invention can be repeated again. Although the present invention describes the detailed internal steps by various reference methods and using different specific embodiments, it is not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. The scope of the present invention should be the following accompanying patent applications The scope is limited. (Jingxian first read the note on the back and fill in this page) d • i Brief description of some representative symbols 10 Lens forming assembly Printed by the Consumer Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 2 The first endpoint 2 6 External surface 3 0 Hole 3 2 Internal surface 3 6 Insert step 4 0 Front phantom 4 4 Rear surface 5 0 Rear phantom 5 4 Rear surface 6 0 Ring 1 0 4 Frame 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 1 0 Pad 4 Second end 8 Groove 1 Slot 4 Transition zone 8, 3 9 Port 2 Front surface 6 Edge 2 Front surface 6 Edge 0 2 Hood 10 Assembly station 67 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (21〇X 297 public love) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention () 112 flat 114 track 1 1 6 drive cylinder 1 2 0 front phantom fixing chuck 1 2 2 1 2 4 Air holes 1 3 0 Rear phantom / mat body fixing chuck (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) '政 --------- Order --- 7-- ---- Line · 1 3 2 Pad support lip 1 3 6 Phantom support sheet 1 3 9 Support post 1 4 2 Pneumatic cylinder 1 4 6 Second port 1 4 9 Camera 1 5 2 Clip 1 5 6 Band Servings 16 Arm 1 6 4 Shoulder 1 6 7 Forearm 1 6 9 Wrist tool 2 2 0 Piston 2 2 4 Coupler 2 3 2 Discharge needle 2 3 6 Tip 2 4 2 Cartridge support block 2 4 6 Coupling block 2 5 0 塡Filling assembly 2 5 4 Insertion end 1 3 4 Piston 1 3 8 Support frame 1 4 0 Cylindrical fixing piece 144 First port 1 4 8 Vacuum port 1 5 0 Clamping fixing chuck 1 5 4 Handle member 1 5 8 Crankshaft Lock 1 6 2 Pneumatic grip 1 6 6 Elbow 1 6 8 Wrist 2 0 0 Filling station 2 2 2 Linear starter 2 3 0 Discharge device 2 3 4 Bottom end 2 4 0 Pneumatic cylinder 2 4 4_Cylinder piston 2 4 8First line 2 5 2Injection needle 2 5 6 Storage end The paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 401522 * A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention () 2 6 0 Pneumatic cylinder 2 6 2 cylinder piston 2 6 4 coupling block 2 6 6 armature support block 3 0 0 curing station 310 cylindrical rod 312 ultraviolet light source 4 0 0 separation device 410 phantom-lens-mould sandwich 4 1 2 nozzle 4 1 4 inlet 4 1 6 outlet 418 gas supply source 4 2 0 component 4 2 2 upper surface 4 2 4 lower surface 4 3 0 motor 4 3 2 paragraph 5 0 0 combination holder 5 1 0 central 512 container / ^ ------- -^ --------- ^ * I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page &gt; Also Zhang Wadu applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

401522 A8 B8 C8 --^____ 六、申請專利範圍 1 ·〜種用以組裝成鏡結構的裝置,該結構係包括了 一個前方模體、一個後方模體、—個具有相對側邊、—個 外部表面、一個經向軸以及在其內部界定有一個軸向延伸 孔洞的墊體,該裝置係包括了: a ·—種裝置,其係用以支撐該墊體者,如此則至少是 該前方模體或是該後方模體則可插入該孔洞之內; b·一種裝置,其係用以將該前方模體予以插入該墊體 孔洞內部者; c .一種裝置,其係用以將該後方模體予以插入該墊體 孔洞內部者;以及 d.—種裝置,其係用以在該墊體之孔洞內以軸向的方 式並相對於另一個模體的模式來移動一個選定了的前方模 體或是後方模體到界於兩個模體間複數個軸向分離位置中 的一個預定的位置處者β 2·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其中,該後方模體插入裝置另外尙包括了一種 裝置,其係用於將該後方模體予以從該墊體的孔洞之內移 動者,如此,該後方模體插入裝置則可同時的將該後方模 體予以插入於該墊體的孔洞之內’以及將該後方模體予以 由該孔洞之內予以移出。 3.根據申請專利範圍第2項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其尙包括了—種裝置’其係用以相對於該經向 軸的方式來旋轉一個選定了的墊體支撐裝置或是模體插入 裝置者,其中,此旋轉裝置係在該後方模體插入裝置由該 $紙浪纽逋用中㈣家鮮(CNS &gt;Α4规格(21(5X297公羡) -----------—裝---.--&gt;1 訂--------成 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消斧合作杜印製401522 A8 B8 C8-^ ____ VI. Scope of patent application 1 ~~ A device for assembling into a mirror structure, the structure includes a front phantom, a rear phantom, one with opposite sides, one The outer surface, a warp beam, and a cushion body defining an axially extending hole in the interior, the device includes: a. A device for supporting the cushion body, so at least the front The phantom or the rear phantom can be inserted into the hole; b. A device for inserting the front phantom into the hole of the cushion body; c. A device for inserting the A rear phantom inserted into the hole of the cushion body; and d. A device for moving a selected one in the hole of the cushion body in an axial manner relative to the pattern of another phantom Front phantom or rear phantom to one of a plurality of axially separated positions bounded between two phantoms at a predetermined position β 2 · According to the first patent application scope for assembly into a mirror structure Device, wherein the rear die The insertion device further includes a device for moving the rear mold body from the hole of the cushion body, so that the rear mold body insertion device can simultaneously insert the rear mold body in the Inside the hole of the cushion body 'and removing the rear phantom from inside the hole. 3. The device for assembling a mirror structure according to item 2 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device 'which is used to rotate a selected pad support relative to the meridional axis. The device or the phantom insertion device, wherein the rotating device is the rear phantom insertion device, which is used by the $ paper wave button (CNS &gt; A4 specification (21 (5X297)) --- ---------- Equipment ---.-- &gt; 1 Order -------- Into (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Cooperative Du Printing 401522 A8 B8 C8 --^____ 六、申請專利範圍 1 ·〜種用以組裝成鏡結構的裝置,該結構係包括了 一個前方模體、一個後方模體、—個具有相對側邊、—個 外部表面、一個經向軸以及在其內部界定有一個軸向延伸 孔洞的墊體,該裝置係包括了: a ·—種裝置,其係用以支撐該墊體者,如此則至少是 該前方模體或是該後方模體則可插入該孔洞之內; b·一種裝置,其係用以將該前方模體予以插入該墊體 孔洞內部者; c .一種裝置,其係用以將該後方模體予以插入該墊體 孔洞內部者;以及 d.—種裝置,其係用以在該墊體之孔洞內以軸向的方 式並相對於另一個模體的模式來移動一個選定了的前方模 體或是後方模體到界於兩個模體間複數個軸向分離位置中 的一個預定的位置處者β 2·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其中,該後方模體插入裝置另外尙包括了一種 裝置,其係用於將該後方模體予以從該墊體的孔洞之內移 動者,如此,該後方模體插入裝置則可同時的將該後方模 體予以插入於該墊體的孔洞之內’以及將該後方模體予以 由該孔洞之內予以移出。 3.根據申請專利範圍第2項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其尙包括了—種裝置’其係用以相對於該經向 軸的方式來旋轉一個選定了的墊體支撐裝置或是模體插入 裝置者,其中,此旋轉裝置係在該後方模體插入裝置由該 $紙浪纽逋用中㈣家鮮(CNS &gt;Α4规格(21(5X297公羡) -----------—裝---.--&gt;1 訂--------成 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消斧合作杜印製 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 墊體孔洞之內將該後方模體予以移出之後才會對一個選定 的墊體支撐裝置或是模體插入裝置予以旋轉,如此,當該 後方模體插入裝置將該後方模體予以插入於該孔洞之內時 ,該墊體係位在完全不同的旋轉角度上。 4·根據申請專利範圍第2項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其中該後方模體插入裝置包括了有: a 個模體支撐板,其係設計成可在該墊體係放置在 該墊體支撐裝置上時而和該後方模體的一部份相接觸;以 及 b · —種裝置,其係和該模體支撐板相連接者,且係用 以在將該模體支撐板在其係處於鄰近於該驾體支撐裝置的 一部份的插入位置,以及在其係處於和該墊體支撐裝置相 隔開一段距離的收縮位置之間來移動該後方模體者》 5·根據申請專利範圍第4項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其尙包括了一種裝置,其係用以相對於該經向 軸的方式來旋轉一個選定了的墊體支撐裝置或是模體插入 裝置者’其中,此旋轉裝置係在該後方模體插入裝置由該 墊體孔洞之內將該後方模體予以移出之後才會對一個選定 的墊體支撐裝置或是模體插入裝置予以旋轉,如此,當該 後方模體插入裝置將該後方模體予以插入於該孔洞之內時 ,該墊體係位在完全不同的旋轉角度上。 6·根據申請專利範圍第4項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置’其尙包括了一種裝置,其係用以決定該後方模 體的一個選定了的尺寸。 2 ^紙張尺度適用中國β家梂準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐) 燊 . i.¾¾ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A8 B8 C8 ____ OS __ 六、申請專利範圍 7·根據申請專利範圍第6項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其中之決定裝置係包括了有: a ·—種裝置,其係在當該後方模體係處在後退位置時 ,而以光學的方式來接收至少是該後方模體結構的一部份 影像者I b. —種裝置,其係將該後方模體之影像予以數據化者 I C 種裝置,其係用以由該後方模體數據化的影像來 產生一些資料,而此資料係包括了該後方模體的高度,其 中,該產生裝置則會產生一種包括該資料的信號。 8·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之甩以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其中該軸向移p裝置係包括了有: a .—個活塞,其係設計成可以離合的方式而在兩個模 體係放置在該墊體的孔洞中時,而和該兩個模體中選定的 一個接觸; b .—個啓動器,其係在於產生一個輸出者; c .一個裝置,其係以機械的方式而將該啓動器耦合於 該活塞,如此,該啓動器的輸出則可轉換成爲該活塞的運 動;以及 d 個裝置,其係在於激發該啓動器者。 9·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡結 構的裝置,其尙包括有一個裝置,其係在於將該兩個模體 予以在該孔洞之內以彼此相距一個預定的距離的方式而固 定者。 3 ---------^---^---1 訂-------^ (請先閲讀背面之注f項再填寫本頁) &gt;紙垠尺度適ϋ家棟準(CNS ) A4说格(210X297公f) 一~&quot; 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 _ 六、申請專利範圍 10·根據申請專利範圍第9項所述之用以組裝成鏡 結構的裝置,其中該固定裝置係包括了一個徑向的夾子。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 11·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡 結構的裝置,其中該前方模體插入裝置係爲一個機械臂, 其係設計成以可分離的方式而和該前方模體的一部份相接 觸、將該前方模體在一個預定的軸向位置處插入該墊體的 孔洞之內,並且和插入的前方模體相分離。 12·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡 結構的裝置,其尙包括有一個裝置,其係在於可於該墊體 的外部表面以及位在該前方模體以及該後方模體之間的孔 洞之間提供流體相連通者,藉此而可促進該兩個模體在該 墊體的孔洞之內以相對於彼此的方式作軸向的運動。 1 3 ·根據申請專利範圍第1 2項所述之用以組裝成 鏡結構的裝置,其中該提供裝置係包括了有: a 個排出針,其係具有一個底端以及一個尖端,此 尖端係設計成可穿越該墊體的一部份以和該孔洞相連通, 其中,該尖端係和該底端而呈相連通者,藉此而可讓流體 在其間流通;以及 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 b.—個裝置,其係在於將該排出針在一個當該尖端係 和該墊體的孔洞而相連通的第一位置,以及在一個當該尖 端係和該墊體的孔洞而相距一段距離的第二位置之間移動 者。 14·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡 結構的裝置,其中,該墊體支撐裝置係另包括了有一個裝 4 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0X297公ίΓΪ &quot; — 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 置,其係用於指示由該墊體所支撐物是否正確吻合。 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 15·根據申請專利範圍第1項所述之用以組裝成鏡 結構的裝置,其尙包括有一個裝置,其係用於將一種透鏡 形成流體予以注入位在該前方模體以及該後方模體間之該 墊體的孔洞之內者。 1 6 ·根據申請專利範圍第1 5項所述之用以組裝成 鏡結構的裝置,其中,該注入裝置係包括了有: a .—個注入針,其係具有一個插入端,該插入端係穿 越過該墊體的一部份以及位在該前方以及後方模體間之孔 洞產生連通、一個接收端,其係設計成可和一個透鏡形成 流體的供應源相連通者,以及一個位在該插入端以及該接 收端之間的通道,其係可讓該透鏡形成流體由該接數端經 由此一通道而流出該插入端,以和該孔洞相連通;以及 b.—個裝置,其係用以在一個當該注入針的插入端係 和該墊體的孔洞相連通時的插入位置,以及一個當該插入 端係和該墊體以及該墊體的孔洞相隔一段距離時的退回位 置之間傳送該注入針。 經濟部智慧財產局貝工消費合作社印製 1 7 · —種用以組裝成鏡結構的裝置,該結構係包括 了一個前方模體、一個後方模體、一個具有相對側邊、一 個外部表面、一個經向軸以及在其內部界定有一個軸向延 伸孔洞的墊體,該裝置係包括了: a 種裝置,其係用以支撐該墊體者,如此則至少是 該前方模體或是該後方模體則可插入該孔洞之內; b.—種裝置,其係用以將該前方模體予以插入該墊體 5 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局8工消費合作杜印製 401522 A8 A8 B8 C8 _ D8 _ 六、申請專利範圍 孔洞內部者; c .一種裝置,其係用以將該後方模體予以插入該墊體 孔洞內部者;以及 d.—種裝置,其係用以相對於該墊體之經向軸的方式 來旋轉一個選定了的前方模體、後方模體或是該墊體’如 此,當兩個模體係插入於該墊體的孔洞內時,係處在複數 個相對於彼此之旋轉位置中的一個位置上。 1 8 · —種用以組裝成鏡結構的裝置,該結構係包括 了一個前方模體、一個後方模體、一個在其內部界定有一 個 軸向延伸孔洞的墊體,該裝置係包括了·: a .—種墊體支撐,其係用以支撐透鏡形成結構者; b.—個機械臂,其係設計成可以離合的方式而和該前 方模體的一部份相接觸,並且可將該前方模體予以插入於 該墊體的孔洞之內;以及 c .一個可活動的活塞,其係設計成可以離合的方式而 和該後方模體的一部份相接觸,並且可將該後方模體予以 插入該墊體的孔洞之內,其中’至少有一個機械臂或是一 個活塞係以相對於另一個模體的方式而在該墊體的孔洞內 以軸向的方式而移動一個其所接觸的前方模體或是後方模 體到複數個軸向分離距離中的—個位置上,其中,介於兩 個模體之間,且係位在該墊體孔洞內部之分離距離對於每 一個軸向分離位置而言均是不同。 1 9 . 一種組合一個透鏡結構的方法,該結構係具有 6 本纸張尺度逋用令困國家揉準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公簸) — ---;----Ί— 訂.-------線, (請先聞讀背面之注意ί項再填寫本頁) ABCD 六、申請專利範圍 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一個前方模體、一個後方模體以及一個具有相對側邊、一 個外部表面、一個經向軸以及在其內部界定有一個軸向延 伸孔洞的墊體,此方法係包括了有: a ·支撐該墊體,如此該前方模體以及該後方模體才可 插入於該墊體的孔洞之內; b .將該後方模體予以放入該墊體的孔洞之內 c .將該前方模體予以放入該墊體的孔洞之內 d.在該墊體的孔洞之內軸向地、且係相對於另一個模 體的方式來移動一個選擇的前方模體或是後方模體到複 數個位在該模體間的軸向分離距離中預定的一個位置上^ 2 ◦•根據申請專利範圍第1 9項所述的方法,其在 軸向移動步驟之前尙具有以下的步驟: 夂將該後方模體予以由該墊體的孔洞之內移開; b .圍繞著該墊體的經向軸以相對於另一個的方式來旋 轉該後方模體或是該墊體;以及 c.重新將該後方模體予以插入於該孔洞之內,如此, 該前方模體以及該後方模體均係位在相對於對方的一個選 定的旋轉角度上。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消资合作社印製 2 1 ·根據申請專利範圍第2 0項所述的方法,其在 移開步驟之後尙包括有決定該後方模體高度的步驟。 2 2 ·根據申請專利範圍第2 1項所述的方法,其中 之決定步驟係包括了: a .以光學的方式來接收該後方模體的一個影像,並產 生一個輸出; 7 本紙張尺度適用中國國^梂準(CNS ) Λ4規格(210X297公釐) 401522 A8 B8 CS D8 六、申請專利範圍 b .將該輸出的信號予以傳送到一個控制器;以及 c ·由以光學式接收的影像來計算該後方模體的高度。 ---------: nfl (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 2 3 ·根據申請專利範圍第2 0項所述的方法,其中 ,該移開步驟係包括了: a .將一個模體支撐板固定在該墊體邊緣的附近,並靠 近於該後方模體,該模體支撐板係設計成以可分離的方式 而和該後方模體的一部份相接觸;以及 b .將該後方模體重新的固定在一個後退位置上。 2 4 ·根據申請專利範圍第2 0項所述的方法,其尙 包括了有在該墊體的外部表面以及位在該前方模體和該後 方模體之中之孔洞之間供應流體相連通關係的步驟,藉此 而可促進模體以相對於彼此的方式作軸向運動。 2 5 · —種用以組裝成鏡結構的方法,該結構係包括 了一個前方模體、一個後方模體、一個具有相對側邊、一 個外部表面、一個經向軸以及在其內部界定有一個軸向延 伸孔洞的墊體,該方法係包括了: a .支撐該墊體,如此,該前方模體以及該後方模體係 可插入於該墊體的孔洞之內; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 b.將該前方模體予以置入於該墊體的孔洞之內; c .圍繞著該墊體的經向軸而相對於另一個的方式來旋 轉該後方模體或是具有前方模體置放於其孔洞內部的墊體 中所選定的一個;以及 d.將該後方模體予以插入於該墊體的孔洞之內,如此 ,該前方模體以及該後方模體係可在該孔洞之內位於一個 8 本紙浪尺度逋用中國國家梂準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 相對於彼此的一個選定的旋轉角度上。 2 6 · —種用以組裝成鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置, 其中,該結構係具有一個前方模體、一個後方模體以及一 個墊體,其係具有相對的側邊,且在其內部係界定了一個 軸向延伸的孔洞,在該孔洞之內,該前方模體以及該後方 模體係以間隔於彼此的方式而位於其中者,該裝置係包括 了有: a .—種裝置,其係用於支撐該結構者; b.—種裝置,其係用以軸向的在該墊體的孔洞內以相 對於另一個模體的方式而移動一個選定了的前方模體或是 後方模體,並將其移至複數個位於兩個模體間軸向分離距 離中的一個位置上; c 種裝置,其係用於在該墊體的外部表面以及位在 該前方模體和該後方模體之間的孔洞之間提供流體相連通 關係者,並藉此來促進模體相對於彼此的軸向運動;以及 d.—種裝置,其係用於將一預定量的透鏡形成流體予 以注入至位在該前方模體以及該後方模體之間墊體的孔洞 之內者。 2 7 .根據申請專利範圍第2 6項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其中,該軸向運動裝置係包 括了有: a 個活塞,其係設計成在當一個模體係位在該墊體 的孔洞之內時可和一個選定了的模體相接觸; b .—個啓動器,其係在於產生一個輸出者; 9 ----------^---„---訂,------威 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家棣準(CNS ) A4洗格(210X297公釐) A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) c .一個裝置,其係以機械的方式而將該啓動器和該活 塞相耦合在一起,如此’該啓動器的輸出則可轉換成爲該 活塞的運動;以及 d .—種裝置,其係用以激發該啓動器者。 2 8 .根據申請專利範圍第2 6項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其尙包括有一種裝置,其係 用於將該模體予以固定在該墊體的孔洞內預定的分離距離 上者。 29·根據申請專利範圍第28項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其中的固定裝置係包括了一 個軸向夾子。 3 0 ·根據申請專利範圍第2 6項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其中,該提供裝置係包括了 有: a .—個排出針,其係具有一個底端以及一個尖端,此 尖端係設計成可穿越該墊體的一部份以和該孔洞相連通, 其中,該尖端係和該底端而呈相連通者,藉此而可讓流體 在其間流通;以及 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 b.—個裝置,其係在於將該排出針在一個當該尖端係 和該墊體的孔洞而相連通的第一位置,以及在一個當該尖 端係和該墊體的孔洞而相距一段距離的第二位置之間移動 者。 3 1 ·根據申請專利範圍第3 0項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其尙包括了有一種裝置,其 10 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家揉準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 401522 A8 Bd D8 六、申請專利範圍 係用於偵測藉由注入裝置所注入由該結構所形成之空間內 透鏡形成流體的液面高度者。 3 2 ·根據申請專利範圍第3 1項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其中,該偵測裝置係包括了 有 a 種裝置,其係和該排出針而呈流體相連通者’藉 此而可在該排出針的一部份內產生一個次大氣壓;以及 b .—種裝置,其係和該排出針而呈流體相連通者’藉 此而可感測該排出針內部的壓力,其中之壓力感測裝置係 在當該空間係充滿了該透鏡形成流體,並造成該透鏡形成 流體係和該排出針的尖端而相連通時,用以偵測壓力的增 加者。 33·根據申請專利範圍第26項所述之用以組裝成 鏡且係使用一種結構的裝置,其中,該注入裝置係包括了 有: a .—個注入針,其係具有一個插入端,該插入端係穿 越過該墊體的一部份以及位在該前方以及後方模體間之孔 洞產生連通、一個接收端,其係設計成可和一個透鏡形成 流體的供應源相連通者,以及一個位在該插入端以及該接 收端之間的通道,其係可讓該透鏡形成流體由該接收端經 由此一通道而流出該插入端,以和該孔洞相連通;以及 b.—個裝置,其係用以在一個當該注入針的插入端係 和該墊體的孔洞相連通時的插入位置,以及一個當該插入 端係和該墊體以及該墊體的孔洞相隔一段距離時的退回位 -------------1---1—訂-----▲ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家梂準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) A8 B8 C8 D8 401522 六、申請專利範圍 置之間傳送該注入針。 3 4 · —種用以形成透鏡的裝置,其係包括有: a . —種裝置,其係用以支擦一種透鏡形成結構者,該 結構係具有一個墊體,在其內部係界定有一個軸向延伸的 孔洞、一個前方模體以及一個後方模體,其中,該前方模 體以及該後方模體係位在該孔洞之內且係彼此相距一段距 離者; b .—種裝置,其係用以軸向地以相對於另一個模體的 方式來移動一個位在該孔洞內之選定了的前方模體或是後 方模體到複數個位於其間之軸向分離距離中預定的一個距 離處; c .一種裝置,其係用於在該墊體的外部表面以及位在 該前方模體以及該後方模體之間的孔洞之間提供流體相連 通的關係,藉此而促進模體相對於彼此間的軸向運動。 3 5 · —種用以組裝成鏡結構的裝置,該結構係包括 了有一個前方模體、一個後方模體以及一個具有相對端點 以及一個經向軸和一個在軸向方向上延伸的孔洞的墊體, 該裝置係包括了有: —個裝置,其係用以支撐該成鏡結構者; 一個裝置,其係用以軸向地在該墊體的孔洞內以相對 於另一個模體的方式來移動一個位在該孔洞內之選定了的 前方模體或是後方模體到複數個位於其間之軸向分離距離 中預定的一個距離處,其中,位在該孔洞內模體之間的分 離距離對於每一個軸向位置而言均是不同的。 12 本紙張尺度遥用令國國家梯準( CNS〉A4规格(210x297公產) ^-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂 丨線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 3 6 ·—種用以組裝成鏡結構的裝置,該結構係包括 了有一個前方模體、一個後方模體以及一個具有相對端點 以及一個經向軸和一個在軸向方向上延伸的孔洞的墊體, 該裝置係包括了有: a .—個用以支撐該成鏡結構的支撐: b.—個活塞,其係設計成以可離合的方式而在當該模 體係位在該墊體內部的孔洞內時,而和一個選定了的前方 模體或是後方模體相接觸; c .一啓動器,其係在於產生一個輸出者; d.—個機械連桿,其係在於將該啓動器予以耦合至該 活塞的一部份處,如此,該啓動器的輸出才可轉換成爲該 活塞的運動,其中,該活塞係將以可離合而接觸的模體予 以運動到複數個軸向位置中的一個位置,在其中,於該墊 體的孔洞內模體的分離距離對於每一個預定的軸向位置而 言是爲不同的;以及 e 種裝置,其係用以激發該啓動器者。 3 7—種用以形成一個成鏡結構的方法,該結構係具 有一個前方模體、一個後方模體以及一個具有相對端點和 一個在軸向上延伸的孔洞的墊體,該方法係包括了有: a. 將該後方模體予以插入於該墊體的孔洞之內; b. 將該前方模體予以插入於該墊體的孔洞之內;以及 c .在各模體均已插入於該孔洞之內後,將一預定量的 透鏡形成流體予以注入至位於該前方模體以及該後方模體 之間的墊體孔洞之內。 13 ^---;---V--訂------&lt;^ (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺逋用中國國家輮準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公i ) 40152^ A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 (請先W讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 3 8 ·根據申請專利範圍第3 7項所述之成一個成鏡 結構的方法,其係包括了在該墊體的孔洞內以相對於另一 個模體的方式而軸向地將一個選定了的前方模體或是後方 模體予以移動至複數個位於兩個模體之間軸向分離位置中 預定的一個位置處的步驟》 3 9 ·根據申請專利範圍第3 7項所述之成一個成鏡 結構的方法,其中’軸向移動的步驟係在注入步驟發生之 前來發生的。 4 ◦•根據申請專利範圍第3 7項所述之成一個成鏡 結構的方法,其尙具有該墊體以及位於該前方模體以及該 後方模體間孔洞之間提供流體相連通的步驟,藉此而促進 注入的步驟。 4 1 ·一種用以形成一透鏡的結構,其係包括了有: a ·—個墊體,其係具有一個第一端點、一個相對於第 一端點的第二端點、一個用以連結該第一端點以及該第二 端點的主體部,並在其間界定出一個沿軸向延伸穿越其間 的孔洞,其中,該孔涧形成了一個內部的表面; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消贫合作社印製 b.—個前方模體,其係具有一個前方表面、一個相對 的後方表面以及一個包覆該前方模體的邊緣;其中,該邊 緣的尺寸係製成可以互補的方式而至少容置於該墊體的孔 洞之內,如此,該邊緣以及該墊體的內部表面在其間形成 了一種密封;以及 c 個後方模體,其係具有一個前方表面、一個相對 的後方表面以及一個包覆該前方模體的邊緣;其中,該邊 本紙張尺度逋用十國國家揉準(。灿)八4規/格(2丨0&gt;&lt;297公釐) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 緣的尺寸係製成可以互補的方式而至少容置於該墊體的孔 洞之內’如此,該邊緣以及該墊體的內部表面在其間形成 了一種密封, 其中,當該前方模體以及該後方模體係均同時的位於 該墊體的孔洞之內時,則在該前方模體的後方面以及該後 方模體的前方表面和該墊體的內部表面之間會形成有一個 體積,以及 前方模體以及該後方模體中所選定的一個係可軸向地 在該孔洞之內以相對於另一個位在孔洞內的模體的方式而 移至複數個位於兩個模體之間軸向分離位置中所預定的一 個位置處,而該體積對於每一個分離位置均是不同者。 4 2 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其尙包括了有一種裝置,其係用以將一種透 鏡形成液體予以注入至由該兩個模體以及該墊體的內部表 面所形成的體積之內。 4 3 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 2項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該注入裝置係包括了有: a .—個注入針,其係具有一個插入端,該插入端係穿 越過該墊體的外部表面,並進入至該體積之內、一個接收 端,其係設計成可和一個透鏡形成流體的供應源相連通者 ,以及一個位在該插入端以及該接收端之間的通道,其係 可讓該透鏡形成流體由該接收端經由此一通道而流出該插 入端,以進入至該體積之內;以及 b.—個裝置,其係用以在一個當該注入針的插入端係 15 ϋ張尺度逋用少®國家播準卬灿)六4規格(210父297公釐) 0¾ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4-5 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消貪合作杜印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 和該墊體的孔洞相連通時的插入位置,以及一個當該插入 端係和該墊體以及該墊體的孔洞相隔一段距離時的退回位 置之間傳送該注入針。 4 4 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其尙包括了有一種裝置,其係用以將前方模 體以及後方模體中所選定的一個模體以相對於另一個模體 以及該墊體的方式而圍繞著該孔洞旋轉。 4 5 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該墊體的孔洞在靠近其第一端點以及 沿著孔洞的一部份之間形成有一個第一直徑,此直徑的尺 寸係製成可以互補的方式而容置該前方模體的邊緣,靠近 其第二端點以及沿著孔洞的一部份之間形成有一個第二直 徑,以及一個位於該第一直徑以及該第二直徑之間的過渡 區,其中,該前方模體的後方表面的形狀係設計成可以互 述的方式而和該過渡區相接觸,以形成一個防漏的密封。 4 6 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 5項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該墊體的第二直徑的尺寸係設計成可 以互補的方式而容置該後方模體的邊緣,如此,該後方模 體才可沿著該孔洞的一部份作軸向移動至距離位在靠近該 過渡區之前方模體的預定分離距離。 4 7 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其尙包括有一裝置,其係用於在一個針穿越 並進入至該墊體之內,並已由該處予以移開之後將該墊體 予以密封者。 ---------裝---i--.—訂------線 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家梂率(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 夂、申請專利範圍 4 8 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該密封裝置係包括了有該墊體係由一 種和該透鏡形成流體相容之聚合物彈性體所形成者。 4 9 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 8項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該聚合物彈性體係由下列的物質中的 一種所挑選出來的:彈性的PVC、矽、krayton 、乙烯、聚氯乙烯或是其中的混合物。 5 0 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其尙包括了一種裝置,其係用於在該墊體的 外部表面以及位於該前方模體以及後方模體之間的孔洞之 間提供流體相連通的關係,藉此來促進模體以相對於互相 的方式作軸向運動。 5 1 ·根據申請專利範圍第5 0項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該提供裝置係包括了一個排出針,其 係具有一個尖端,其係設計成可穿越過該墊體的主體部以 和其孔洞相連通,以及一個相對的底端,該底端係和尖端 相連通者,藉此而可使得流體得以在其間流通。 5 2 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該墊體係由可和透鏡形成流體相容之 彈性的聚合物所製成。 5 3 ·根據申請專利範圍第5 2項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中,該彈性的聚合物係由下列的物質中的 一種所挑選出來的:彈性的PVC、矽、krayton 、乙烯、聚氯乙烯或是其中的混合物。 17 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家榡準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) ^.---^---AIIT------.it (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消貪合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 5 4 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構’其中’該墊體尙包括了有至少一個形成在該 墊體的外部表面、以及孔洞之間的埠,該埠係和該孔洞而 相連通者。 5 5 ·根據申請專利範圍第4 1項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中’該埠係和由該前方模體的後方表面、 該後方模體的前方表面以及由該墊體的內部表面所形成的 體積而相互的連通者。 5 6 *根據申請專利範圍第5 4項所述之用以形成一 透鏡的結構,其中’該埠係設計成可在其內部容置至少一 部份的一根針,如此,該針就不用插入於該孔洞之內而仍 能和該墊體的孔洞呈現相連通的關係。 5 7 . —種使用一前方模體以及一個後方模體以形成 一透鏡的墊體,其係具有一個第一端點、一個相對的第二 端點、一個主體部,其係連結著該第一端點及該第二端點 者,且在其間界定著有一個穿越其中的孔洞,該主體部係 具有一個外部表面,而該孔洞則界定了一個內部表面,該 孔洞係具有足夠的尺寸以在其內部容置該前方模體以及該 後方模體,如此,在選定了的一個前方模體或是後方模體 則可以相對於另一個模體的方式而在軸向上移至界於該模 體之間複數個軸向分離距離中的一個預定的距離處。 5 8 ·根據申請專利範圍第5 7項所述之使用一前方 模以及一個後方模體以形成一透鏡的墊體,其中,該墊體 的孔洞係在鄰近於其第一端點處形成一個沿著該孔洞一部 18 (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國两家梂準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 401522 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 份延伸之第一直徑,該第一直徑的尺寸係可以互補的方式 而容置該前方模體,同時’該墊體的孔洞係在鄰近於其第 二端點處形成一個沿著該孔洞一部份延伸之第二直徑,以 及一個位在該第一直徑和第二直徑之間的過渡區,其中, 一部份的前方模體的形狀係設計成可以互補的方式而和該 過渡區相接觸,以和其形成一個密封的結構。 5 9 .根據申請專利範圍第5 8項所述之使用一前方 模以及一個後方模體以形成一透鏡的墊體,其中,該墊體 第二直徑的尺寸係設計成可在其內部容置該後方模體,如 此該後方模體則可至少沿著該孔洞的一部份作軸向的運動 ,而可到距離鄰近於該過渡區之前方模體的一個預定的分 離距離。 6 0 ·根據申請專利範圍第5 7項所述之使用一前方 模以及一個後方模體以形成一透鏡的墊體,其中,該墊體 係由一種和透鏡形成流體而相容的彈性聚合物所形成者。 6 1 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 0項所述之使用一前方 模以及一個後方模體以形成一透鏡的墊體,其中,形成該 墊體的彈性聚合物係由以下各種物質中所加以選擇者,其 係包括彈性的PVC、矽、krayton、乙烯、聚氯 乙烯或是其混合物。 6 2 · —種用以儲存一透鏡形成流體的方法,其係包 括了將透鏡形成流體予以暴露在一種紫外線光線下達一預 定的時間,藉此而可增加該透鏡形成流體的黏滯性,而其 暴露的時間則大約是介於2 0秒到3 〇分鐘之間。 本紙浪尺度逋用中_國家揉準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 裝--------訂-------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 401522 A8 B8 C8 _ D8__ 六、申請專利範圍 6 3 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 2項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流體的方法,其中,該暴露的時間係介於3 0秒 到2分鐘之間。 6 4 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 2項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流體的方法,其中,該暴露的時間係介於4 5秒 到9 0秒之間。 6 5 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 2項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流體的方法,其在暴露的步驟之後尙包括了對該 透鏡形成流體加熱的步驟。 6 6 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 2項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流體的方法,其中,該透鏡形成流體是爲一種單 體。 6 7 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 2項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流體的方法,其中,該暴露的步驟係藉由將該透 鏡形成流體放在複數個紫外線光源之間而發生的。 6 8 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 2項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流體的方法,其中,該紫外線光的強度至少是 i.2xl(T2瓦每平方公分,且具有之波長是爲3 5 0毫米&quot; 6 9 ·—種用以儲存一透鏡形成流體的方法,其係包 括了下列的步驟: a .藉由將該透鏡形成流體予以暴露在一種紫外線光下 來增加透鏡形成流體的黏滯性,其中,該暴露的時間係介 於2 0秒到3 0分鐘之間;以及 b .緊接於增加的步驟後,藉由對該透鏡形成流體予以 20 用中國國家#準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公ίΠ 一 &quot;&quot; ---------¾-----------.il (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 401522 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 加熱來對其固化。 (請先《讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 7 0 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 9項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流的方法,其中,預定的暴露時間係介於3 〇秒 到二分鐘之間。 7 1 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 9項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流的方法,其中,預定的暴露時間係介於4 〇秒 到9 0秒之間。 7 2 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 9項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流的方法,其中,在固化步驟中所加之熱係由紅 外線熱產生器所產生者。 7 3 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 9項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流的方法,其中,該透鏡形成流體是爲一種單體 〇 7 4 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 9項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流的方法,其中,增加的步驟係藉由將該透鏡形 成流體予以放在複數個紫外線光源之間而發生的。 經濟部智慧財產局負工消費合作社印製 7 5 ·根據申請專利範圍第6 9項所述之用以儲存一 透鏡形成流的方法,其中,該紫外線光的強度至少是 l.2xl〇_2瓦每平方公分,且具有之波長是爲3 5 0毫米。 21 本紙张尺度適用中國國家梂準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公釐)401522 A8 B8 C8-^ ____ VI. Scope of patent application 1 ~~ A device for assembling into a mirror structure, the structure includes a front phantom, a rear phantom, one with opposite sides, one The outer surface, a warp beam, and a cushion body defining an axially extending hole in the interior, the device includes: a. A device for supporting the cushion body, so at least the front The phantom or the rear phantom can be inserted into the hole; b. A device for inserting the front phantom into the hole of the cushion body; c. A device for inserting the A rear phantom inserted into the hole of the cushion body; and d. A device for moving a selected one in the hole of the cushion body in an axial manner relative to the pattern of another phantom Front phantom or rear phantom to one of a plurality of axially separated positions bounded between two phantoms at a predetermined position β 2 · According to the first patent application scope for assembly into a mirror structure Device, wherein the rear die The insertion device further includes a device for moving the rear mold body from the hole of the cushion body, so that the rear mold body insertion device can simultaneously insert the rear mold body in the Inside the hole of the cushion body 'and removing the rear phantom from inside the hole. 3. The device for assembling a mirror structure according to item 2 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device 'which is used to rotate a selected pad support relative to the meridional axis. The device or the phantom insertion device, wherein the rotating device is at the rear phantom insertion device, which is used by the $ paper wave button (CNS &gt; A4 specification (21 (5X297)) --- ---------- Equipment ---.-- &gt; 1 Order -------- Into (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Co-printed by Du Α8 Β8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 6. The scope of the patent application for the pad body is removed after the rear phantom is removed. The insertion device is rotated, so that when the rear mold body insertion device inserts the rear mold body into the hole, the cushion system is positioned at a completely different rotation angle. 4. According to the second patent application scope The device for assembling into a mirror structure, wherein the rear phantom insertion device It includes: a phantom support plate, which is designed to be in contact with a part of the rear phantom when the pad system is placed on the pad support device; and b. A device, which And is connected to the phantom support plate, and is used for inserting the phantom support plate in a position adjacent to a part of the driving body support device, and in a position where it is in contact with the cushion body. The supporting device moves the rear phantom between retracted positions separated by a distance "5. The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 4 of the scope of patent application, which includes a device which is used for A selected pad support device or phantom insertion device is rotated relative to the warp axis, wherein the rotation device is located in the back of the phantom insertion device and the rear of the phantom insertion device After the phantom is removed, a selected pad support device or phantom insertion device is rotated. In this way, when the rear phantom insertion device inserts the rear phantom into the hole, the pad system Finish Different rotation angles. 6. According to the patent application scope item 4 for the device to be assembled into a mirror structure, which includes a device that is used to determine a selected size of the rear phantom 2 ^ Paper size is applicable to China β standard (CNS) Α4 size (210X297 mm) 燊. I.¾¾ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A8 B8 C8 ____ OS __ VI. Scope of patent application 7. The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 6 of the scope of patent application. The decision device includes: a. A device that is When the rear mold system is in a retracted position, and optically receives at least a part of the image of the rear phantom structure I b. — A device that digitizes the image of the rear phantom This IC device is used to generate some data from the digitalized image of the rear phantom, and this data includes the height of the rear phantom. Among them, the generating device generates a type including the Information signals. 8. The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the axial shifting device includes: a. A piston, which is designed to be clutchable in two ways When a mold system is placed in the hole of the pad body, it is in contact with a selected one of the two mold bodies; b. An initiator that is used to generate an output; c. A device that is mechanical The starter is coupled to the piston in such a way that the output of the starter can be converted into the movement of the piston; and d devices are designed to excite the starter. 9. The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device for placing the two phantoms within the hole at a predetermined distance from each other. By the way and fixed. 3 --------- ^ --- ^ --- 1 Order ------- ^ (Please read the note f on the back before filling this page) &gt; Building standard (CNS) A4 grid (210X297 male f) 1 ~ &quot; 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 _ VI. Patent application scope 10 · The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 9 of the patent application scope, where The fixture includes a radial clip. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 11. According to the device for assembling a mirror structure described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, the front phantom insertion device is a mechanical arm, which is designed In a detachable manner to contact a part of the front phantom, insert the front phantom into a hole of the cushion body at a predetermined axial position, and separate from the inserted front phantom . 12. The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, which includes a device which can be located on the outer surface of the cushion body and located on the front mold body and the rear mold. Fluid communication is provided between the holes between the bodies, thereby facilitating the axial movement of the two phantoms within the holes of the cushion body relative to each other. 1 3 · The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 12 of the scope of patent application, wherein the providing device includes: a discharge needle having a bottom end and a tip, and the tip is Designed to pass through a part of the cushion body to communicate with the hole, where the tip is in communication with the bottom end, so that fluid can flow through it; and employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative b. A device that consists of the ejection needle in a first position that communicates with the tip line and the hole of the cushion body, and at a hole that acts as the tip line and the cushion body And movers between the second positions a distance away. 14. The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the cushion body supporting device further includes a device containing 4 papers which are applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2丨 0X297 公 ίΓΪ &quot; — 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of the patent application is used to indicate whether the support supported by the mat is correctly matched. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 15 · The device for assembling a lens structure according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application includes a device for injecting a lens-forming fluid between the front mold body and the rear mold body. Inside the hole of the cushion body. 1 6 · The device for assembling into a mirror structure according to item 15 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the injection device includes: a. An injection needle, which The system has an insertion end that passes through a part of the cushion body and the holes between the front and rear phantoms to create a connection. A receiving end is designed to be formed with a lens. The body's supply source is connected, and a channel is located between the insertion end and the receiving end, which allows the lens to form fluid from the connection end to flow out of the insertion end through the passage to communicate with the The holes communicate with each other; and b. A device for inserting a position when the insertion end system of the injection needle communicates with the hole of the cushion body, and a device when the insertion end system and the cushion body and The injection needle is transferred between the retracted positions when the holes of the cushion body are separated by a distance. Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 17 · A device for assembling a mirror structure, the structure includes a A front phantom, a rear phantom, an opposite side edge, an outer surface, a warp beam, and a cushion body defining an axially extending hole in the interior. The device includes: a device, which is For supporting the cushion body, at least the front mold body or the rear mold body can be inserted into the hole; b. A device for inserting the front mold body into the cushion body5 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm). Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, 8th Industrial Cooperation, Du Printing 401522 A8 A8 B8 C8 _ D8 _ 6. Those who apply for patents and are inside the holes; c. A device for inserting the rear phantom into the hole of the cushion body; and d. A device for rotating a selected front side relative to the longitudinal axis of the cushion body The phantom, the rear phantom, or the cushion body 'So, when two mold systems are inserted into the holes of the cushion body, they are in one of a plurality of rotational positions relative to each other. 1 8 · — A device for assembling into a mirror structure. The structure includes a front mold body, a rear mold body, and a cushion body defining an axially extending hole in the interior. The device system includes: a.- A cushion support, which is used to support the lens forming structure; b. A mechanical arm, which is designed to be in contact with a part of the front phantom in a clutch manner, and the front phantom can be Insert in Inside the hole of the cushion body; and c. A movable piston designed to be in contact with a part of the rear mold body in a clutch manner, and the rear mold body can be inserted into the cushion body Within the hole of which 'at least one mechanical arm or a piston is moved relative to the other phantom in an axial manner within the hole of the cushion body to move a front phantom or The distance from the rear phantom to a plurality of axial separation distances, where the separation distance between the two phantoms and located inside the hole of the cushion body is for each axial separation position All are different. 1 9. A method of combining a lens structure, the structure has 6 paper sizes, used to make it difficult for countries in trouble (CNS) A4 size (210X297 male dust) — ---; ---- Ί — order. ------- line, (please read the attention on the back first and then fill out this page) ABCD VI. Patent Application Scope (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) One front phantom, one rear A phantom and a pad having opposite sides, an outer surface, a warp beam, and an axially extending hole defined within the pad. The method includes: a. Supporting the pad so that the front die Body and the rear mold body can be inserted into the holes of the cushion body; b. The rear mold body is placed into the holes of the cushion body c. The front mold body is put into the holes of the cushion body Within d. Move a selected front phantom or rear phantom axially and relative to another phantom to a plurality of axes positioned between the phantoms within the hole of the pad body To a predetermined position in the separation distance ^ 2 ◦ 1st according to the scope of patent application The method according to item 9, which has the following steps before the step of axial movement: 夂 removing the rear mold body from the hole of the cushion body; b. Surrounding the longitudinal axis of the cushion body with Rotate the rear phantom or the mat relative to the other way; and c. Re-insert the rear phantom into the hole, so that the front phantom and the rear phantom are both located in Relative to each other on a selected rotation angle. Printed by the Intellectual Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 1 According to the method described in Item 20 of the scope of patent application, it includes a step of determining the height of the rear phantom after the removal step. 2 2 · The method according to item 21 of the scope of patent application, wherein the determining steps include: a. Optically receiving an image of the rear phantom and generating an output; 7 This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) 401522 A8 B8 CS D8 VI. Patent application scope b. The output signal is transmitted to a controller; and c. The image is received optically. Calculate the height of the rear phantom. ---------: nfl (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 2 3 · According to the method described in item 20 of the scope of patent application, the removal step includes: a. A phantom support plate is fixed near the edge of the cushion body and close to the rear phantom. The phantom support plate is designed to contact a part of the rear phantom in a detachable manner. ; And b. Refix the rear phantom in a retracted position. 2 4 · The method according to item 20 of the scope of the patent application, which includes providing fluid communication between the outer surface of the cushion body and holes located in the front mold body and the rear mold body. The step of the relationship, thereby facilitating the axial movement of the phantoms relative to each other. 2 5 · — A method for assembling a mirror structure, the structure includes a front phantom, a rear phantom, an opposite side edge, an outer surface, a warp axis, and an interior delimiting a A cushion body with axially extending holes, the method includes: a. Supporting the cushion body, so that the front mold body and the rear mold system can be inserted into the holes of the cushion body; consumption by employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative b. Place the front phantom into the hole of the pad; c. Rotate the rear phantom relative to the other around the meridional axis of the pad or have the front The phantom is placed in a selected one of the cushion body inside the hole; and d. The rear mold body is inserted into the hole of the cushion body, so that the front mold body and the rear mold system can be in the The hole is located in an 8-paper scale, using the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of patent application is at a selected rotation angle relative to each other. 2 6 · —A device for assembling a mirror and using a structure, wherein the structure has a front phantom, a rear phantom, and a cushion body, which have opposite sides and are inside thereof The system defines an axially extending hole, and within the hole, the front mold body and the rear mold system are located at a distance from each other. The device includes: a. A device, which Is used to support the structure; b. A device used to move a selected front die or rear die axially within the hole of the cushion body relative to another die Body and move it to one of a plurality of axial separation distances between the two phantoms; c device for the outer surface of the cushion body and the front phantom and the rear Fluid communication is provided between the holes between the phantoms, thereby facilitating the axial movement of the phantoms relative to each other; and d. A device for applying a predetermined amount of lens forming fluid to Inject in front of that Within the phantom and the holes in the cushion between the rear phantoms. 27. The device for assembling a mirror and using a structure according to item 26 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the axial movement device includes: a piston, which is designed to act as a The mold system can be in contact with a selected mold body when it is located in the hole of the cushion body; b. An initiator, which is to generate an output; 9 ---------- ^ --- „--- Order, ------ Wei (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed on paper standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Intellectual Property Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives This paper is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 Washer (210X297 mm) A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Scope of patent application (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) c. A device that mechanically connects the starter and the piston Are coupled together so that 'the output of the starter can be converted into the movement of the piston; and d. A device which is used to excite the starter. 2 8. According to item 26 of the scope of the patent application A device for assembling into a mirror and using a structure, which includes a A device for fixing the phantom at a predetermined separation distance in the hole of the cushion body. 29. According to the scope of the patent application No. 28, it is used to assemble a mirror and uses a structure. The device, wherein the fixing device includes an axial clip. 30. The device for assembling into a mirror and using a structure according to item 26 of the patent application scope, wherein the providing device includes : A. A discharge needle having a bottom end and a tip, the tip is designed to pass through a part of the pad body to communicate with the hole, wherein the tip is formed with the bottom end Connected by this to allow fluid to circulate between them; and printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs b. A device which consists in placing the ejection needle in a hole when the tip line and the pad body And the first position connected with each other and the second position separated by a distance when the tip line and the hole of the cushion body are moved. 3 1 · Used as described in item 30 of the scope of patent application group It is a mirror and uses a structured device, which includes a device. Its 10 paper sizes are printed using the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm). Printed by the staff of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 401522 A8 Bd D8 6. The scope of patent application is used to detect the liquid level of the lens-forming fluid in the space formed by the structure injected by the injection device. 3 2 · According to item 31 of the scope of patent application The device is used to assemble a mirror and uses a structure, wherein the detection device includes a device that is in fluid communication with the ejection needle. A sub-atmospheric pressure is generated in a part; and b. A device which is in fluid communication with the ejection needle ', whereby the pressure inside the ejection needle can be sensed, wherein the pressure sensing device is in When the space system is filled with the lens-forming fluid and causes the lens-forming flow system to communicate with the tip of the ejection needle, it is used to detect an increase in pressure. 33. The device for assembling a mirror and using a structure according to item 26 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the injection device includes: a. An injection needle having an insertion end, the The insertion end passes through a part of the cushion body and the holes between the front and rear phantoms to create a connection, a receiving end, which is designed to be connected to a lens supply fluid supply source, and a The channel between the insertion end and the receiving end allows the lens-forming fluid to flow out of the insertion end from the receiving end through the channel to communicate with the hole; and b. A device, It is used for an insertion position when the insertion end of the injection needle is in communication with the hole of the cushion body, and a return when the insertion end is separated from the cushion body and the hole of the cushion body by a distance. Position ------------- 1 --- 1—Order ----- ▲ (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) A8 B8 C8 D8 401522 6 The transfer between the injection needle Patent application range position. 3 4 · —A device for forming a lens, which includes: a. —A device for supporting a lens forming structure, the structure has a cushion body, and an inner portion defines a An axially extending hole, a front mold body and a rear mold body, wherein the front mold body and the rear mold system are located within the hole and are at a distance from each other; b. A device used for Moving a selected front or rear phantom located in the hole axially relative to another phantom to a predetermined distance among a plurality of axial separation distances therebetween; c. A device for providing a fluid communication relationship between an outer surface of the cushion body and a hole between the front mold body and the rear mold body, thereby promoting the mold bodies relative to each other Between axial movements. 3 5 · —A device for assembling a mirror structure, the structure includes a front phantom, a rear phantom, an opposite end point, a warp axis, and a hole extending in the axial direction The device body includes:-a device for supporting the lens-forming structure; a device for axially positioning in the hole of the body relative to another mold body Method to move a selected front phantom or rear phantom located in the hole to a predetermined distance among a plurality of axial separation distances therebetween, among which, located between the phantoms in the hole The separation distance is different for each axial position. 12 This paper scales the national standard for remote use (CNS> A4 size (210x297)) ^-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order 丨 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs for consumer cooperation Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Application for Patent Range 3 6-A device for assembling into a mirror structure, the structure includes a front module, a rear module, and A cushion body with opposite ends, a warp axis and a hole extending in the axial direction, the device includes: a. A support for supporting the mirror-forming structure: b. A piston , Which is designed to be detachable in contact with a selected front phantom or rear phantom when the mold system is located in a hole inside the cushion body; c. A starter, It is to generate an output; d. A mechanical link, which is to couple the starter to a part of the piston, so that the output of the starter can be converted into the movement of the piston In which, the piston system will move the phantom that can be contacted to one of a plurality of axial positions, wherein the separation distance of the phantom in the hole of the cushion body is for each predetermined axial direction. The position is different; and e devices are used to excite the starter. 37—A method for forming a mirror-forming structure, which has a front phantom and a rear phantom And a cushion body having opposite ends and a hole extending in the axial direction, the method includes: a. Inserting the rear mold body into the hole of the cushion body; b. Inserting the front mold body Is inserted into the hole of the cushion body; and c. After each mold body has been inserted into the hole, a predetermined amount of lens forming fluid is injected into the front mold body and the rear mold body Between the holes of the cushion body. 13 ^ ---; --- V--order ------ &lt; ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 male i) 40152 ^ A8 B8 C8 D8 (Read the notes on the back of the page and fill in this page again) 3 8 · The method of forming a mirror structure according to item 37 of the scope of the patent application, which includes the hole in the pad body to be opposite to the other mold Step of axially moving a selected front phantom or rear phantom to a plurality of predetermined positions in an axially separated position between the two phantoms "3 9 · According to the application The method for forming a mirror structure described in item 37 of the patent scope, in which the step of “axial movement” occurs before the injection step occurs. 4 ◦ • The method of forming a mirror structure according to item 37 of the scope of patent application, which has the steps of providing fluid communication between the pad body and the holes between the front mold body and the rear mold body This facilitates the injection step. 4 1 · A structure for forming a lens, comprising: a · a pad body having a first end point, a second end point opposite to the first end point, and a The main part connecting the first end point and the second end point defines a hole extending therethrough in the axial direction, wherein the hole forms an internal surface; Printed by a poor cooperative b. A front phantom, which has a front surface, an opposite rear surface, and an edge covering the front phantom; wherein the size of the edge is made in a complementary manner and at least Contained in the hole of the cushion body, so that the edge and the inner surface of the cushion body form a seal therebetween; and c rear phantoms, which have a front surface, an opposite rear surface, and a Wrap the edge of the front phantom; wherein, the paper size of the edge is to be calibrated in ten countries (. Can) 8 4 gauge / div (2 丨 0 &gt; &lt; 297 mm) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The size of the edge of the patent application is made in a complementary manner and at least fits within the hole of the cushion body. 'So, the edge and the inner surface of the cushion body A seal is formed therebetween, wherein when the front mold body and the rear mold system are both located in the holes of the cushion body at the same time, the rear surface of the front mold body and the front surface of the rear mold body and A volume is formed between the inner surfaces of the cushion body, and a selected one of the front mold body and the rear mold body can be axially within the hole with respect to another mold body located in the hole. To move to a predetermined position among the axially separated positions between the two phantoms, and the volume is different for each of the separated positions. 4 2 The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device for injecting a lens forming liquid into the two phantoms and the Within the volume formed by the inner surface of the cushion body. 4 3 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 42 of the scope of patent application, wherein the injection device includes: a. An injection needle having an insertion end, the insertion end is Passing through the external surface of the pad body and entering the volume, a receiving end is designed to be in communication with a lens-forming fluid supply source, and one is located at the insertion end and at the receiving end. Between channels, which allows the lens-forming fluid to flow from the receiving end through the channel to the insertion end to enter the volume; and b. A device for injecting The insertion end of the needle is 15 ϋ 逋 逋 少 ® National Broadcasting Standard 卬 6) 4 (210 mm 297 mm) 0¾ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 4-5 Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau Consumer Consumption Co-operative Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Employees' Anti-Corruption Cooperation Du printed A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of the patent application and the hole in the pad are connected, and when the insertion end is connected to the pad Body The injection needle is transferred between the retracted position when the holes of the pad body are separated by a distance. 4 4 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device for connecting a selected one of the front phantom and the rear phantom to Rotating around the hole relative to the other phantom and the way of the cushion body. 4 5 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of patent application, wherein the hole of the cushion body is formed with a first hole near the first end point and a part along the hole. A diameter whose dimensions are made to accommodate the edges of the front phantom in a complementary manner, a second diameter is formed near its second endpoint and a portion along the hole, and a second The transition area between the first diameter and the second diameter, wherein the shape of the rear surface of the front phantom is designed to contact the transition area in a mutually-interpretable manner to form a leak-proof seal. 4 6 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 45 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the size of the second diameter of the cushion body is designed to accommodate the edges of the rear mold body in a complementary manner, In this way, the rear phantom can move axially along a part of the hole to a predetermined separation distance from the square phantom located near the transition zone. 4 7 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device for passing through a needle and entering into the pad body, and has been passed therefrom. The person who sealed the pad body after removing it. --------- Installation --- i --.-- Order ------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper uses China National Standard (CNS) ) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, consumer cooperation, printed with patent application scope 4 8 · According to the scope of patent application scope 41 to form a lens structure Wherein, the sealing device includes the pad system formed by a polymer elastomer which is fluid compatible with the lens. 4 9 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 48 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the polymer elastic system is selected from one of the following: elastic PVC, silicon, krayton, ethylene , Polyvinyl chloride or a mixture thereof. 50. The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a device for the outer surface of the cushion body and the front mold body and the rear mold body. The holes between them provide a fluid communication relationship, thereby facilitating the axial movement of the phantoms relative to each other. 5 1 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 50 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the providing device includes a discharge needle having a tip and is designed to pass through the cushion body The main body part is connected with its hole, and an opposite bottom end, which is connected with the tip end, so that the fluid can be circulated therebetween. 5 2 The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the pad system is made of a polymer that is fluid-compatible and elastic with the lens. 5 3 · The structure for forming a lens according to Item 52 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the elastic polymer is selected from one of the following materials: elastic PVC, silicon, krayton, Ethylene, polyvinyl chloride or mixtures thereof. 17 This paper uses China National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm) ^ .--- ^ --- AIIT------.it (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page ) 401522 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Anti-corruption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Patent application scope 5 4 · According to the scope of patent application item 41, the structure used to form a lens 'where' the mat body 尙It includes at least one port formed between the outer surface of the pad body and the hole, and the port system is in communication with the hole. 5 5 · The structure for forming a lens according to item 41 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the port system and the rear surface of the front mold body, the front surface of the rear mold body, and the Connected by the volume formed by the internal surface. 5 6 * The structure for forming a lens according to item 54 of the scope of the patent application, where 'the port is designed to accommodate at least a part of a needle in the interior, so the needle is not needed It is inserted into the hole and still can communicate with the hole of the cushion body. 5 7. A cushion body using a front phantom and a rear phantom to form a lens, which has a first end point, an opposite second end point, and a main body portion, which are connected to the first end point. An end point and the second end point, and a hole passing therethrough is defined, the main body system has an outer surface, and the hole defines an inner surface, and the hole system has sufficient size to The front phantom and the rear phantom are housed inside, so that a selected one of the front phantom or the rear phantom can be moved axially to the boundary of the mold relative to the other phantom. One of a plurality of axial separation distances between the bodies is at a predetermined distance. 5 8 · A cushion body using a front mold and a rear mold body to form a lens according to item 57 of the scope of patent application, wherein the hole of the cushion body is formed adjacent to its first end point. Along the hole 18 (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to the two China Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) 401522 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The first diameter of the extension of the scope of the patent application, the size of the first diameter can accommodate the front phantom in a complementary manner, and at the same time, the hole of the cushion body is adjacent to its second end A second diameter extending along a part of the hole and a transition region between the first and second diameters are formed at the points, wherein the shape of the part of the front phantom is designed to be The transition zone is contacted in a complementary manner to form a sealed structure with it. 59. The cushion body using a front mold and a rear mold body to form a lens according to item 58 of the scope of patent application, wherein the size of the second diameter of the cushion body is designed to be accommodated in the cushion body. The rear phantom, so that the rear phantom can move axially along at least a part of the hole, and can reach a predetermined separation distance from the square phantom adjacent to the front of the transition zone. 6 0 · A cushion body using a front mold and a rear mold body to form a lens according to item 57 of the scope of patent application, wherein the cushion system is made of an elastic polymer compatible with the lens forming fluid. Former. 6 1 · A cushion body using a front mold and a rear mold body to form a lens according to item 60 of the scope of patent application, wherein the elastic polymer forming the cushion body is selected from the following materials Or, it includes flexible PVC, silicon, krayton, ethylene, polyvinyl chloride or a mixture thereof. 6 2 · A method for storing a lens-forming fluid, which includes exposing the lens-forming fluid to an ultraviolet ray for a predetermined time, thereby increasing the viscosity of the lens-forming fluid, and The exposure time is between 20 seconds and 30 minutes. The paper scale is in use _ National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) Packing -------- Order ------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 401522 A8 B8 C8 _ D8__ VI. Scope of patent application 6 3 · The method for storing a lens-forming fluid according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, wherein the exposure The time is between 30 seconds and 2 minutes. 64. The method for storing a lens-forming fluid according to item 62 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the exposure time is between 45 seconds and 90 seconds. 65. The method for storing a lens-forming fluid according to item 62 of the scope of the patent application, which includes a step of heating the lens-forming fluid after the step of exposing. 6 6 The method for storing a lens-forming fluid according to item 62 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the lens-forming fluid is a single body. 67. The method for storing a lens-forming fluid according to item 62 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the step of exposing occurs by placing the lens-forming fluid between a plurality of ultraviolet light sources. 6 8 · The method for storing a lens-forming fluid according to item 62 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the intensity of the ultraviolet light is at least i.2xl (T2 watts per square centimeter and has a wavelength of 3 50 mm &quot; 6 9 · A method for storing a lens-forming fluid, which includes the following steps: a. Increasing the viscosity of the lens-forming fluid by exposing the lens-forming fluid to an ultraviolet light Hysteresis, wherein the exposure time is between 20 seconds and 30 minutes; and b. Immediately after the step of increasing, by applying 20 to the lens forming fluid, a Chinese country # 准 (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 male ίΠ &quot; &quot; --------- ¾ ----------. Il (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 401522 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 VI. Applying patent range heating to cure it. (Please read the “Notes on the back side before filling out this page”) 7 0 · The method for storing a lens forming stream as described in item 6 9 of the patent application range Among them, the predetermined exposure time is between 30 seconds and two minutes. 7 1 · The method for storing a lens-forming stream according to item 69 of the patent application scope, wherein the predetermined exposure time is between 40 seconds and 90 seconds. 7 2 · According to the patent application scope The method for storing a lens forming stream according to item 69, wherein the heat added in the curing step is generated by an infrared heat generator. 7 3 · According to the item 69 of the scope of the patent application A method for storing a lens-forming stream, wherein the lens-forming fluid is a monomer 704. The method for storing a lens-forming stream according to item 69 of the patent application scope, wherein The steps occur by placing the lens-forming fluid between a plurality of ultraviolet light sources. Printed by the Consumer Goods Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 7 5 · For storage according to item 6 and 9 of the scope of patent application A method for forming a stream by a lens, wherein the intensity of the ultraviolet light is at least 1.2 × 10_2 watts per square centimeter and has a wavelength of 350 mm. 21 This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS)Α4 specifications (210X297 mm)
TW87104368A 1998-03-24 1998-03-24 Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor TW401522B (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW87104368A TW401522B (en) 1998-03-24 1998-03-24 Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW87104368A TW401522B (en) 1998-03-24 1998-03-24 Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW401522B true TW401522B (en) 2000-08-11

Family

ID=21629751

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW87104368A TW401522B (en) 1998-03-24 1998-03-24 Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TW401522B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11867928B2 (en) 2018-03-29 2024-01-09 Adlens Limited Methods and assemblies relating to the manufacture of variable focusing power optical devices

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11867928B2 (en) 2018-03-29 2024-01-09 Adlens Limited Methods and assemblies relating to the manufacture of variable focusing power optical devices

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR20000075488A (en) Gasket for lens making
US4944899A (en) Process and apparatus for casting lenses
US6627124B1 (en) Single mould alignment
US5578332A (en) Contact lens mould
US5200121A (en) Method for the manufacture of contact lenses
CN107253116B (en) Method for modifying or being coated with eyeglass
EP1294555B1 (en) Process for the automated manufacture of spectacle lenses
WO1998026707A1 (en) Plastic trial lens, its injection molded article and its molding apparatus
JP2018532150A (en) Smoothing of 3D printing lens
CN100447585C (en) New type lens, fabricating technique, and fabrication die
US4681295A (en) Tricurve optical metal master mold and method of making
TW401522B (en) Method and apparatus for assembling a lens-forming device and gasket therefor
EP0145516B1 (en) Cutting device and method for the precision trimming of the edge of a cast contact lens
CA1253368A (en) Tricurve hydrophilic contact lens and process of molding same
JPH11170275A (en) Lens molding apparatus and tool
US4584148A (en) Method for the precision trimming of the edge of a centrifugally cast lens
JPH0584755A (en) Production of plastic lens for glasses
JPS59120425A (en) Formation of lens
HUE027151T2 (en) Method and system of measuring toric lens axis angle
US20200183192A1 (en) Method for manufacturing toric contact lenses
JP5935206B2 (en) Contact lens manufacturing method and manufacturing apparatus used therefor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent